THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


jroupXV.    tfo.158 


Price  10  cents 


.THI/ETIC    I/IBRARY 


Indoor 


N9l 


MERICAN  SPORTS  PUBLISHING  C° 

—*~*i       21  TVarren  Street.  NewYorK.    (jpN^.'H 
-       jil  lllii    '''''iiiiii 

lllliiiiiiiniiuiiuiiiiiinwNiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiHiiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiiiitumiiuiiuiuiiiiiiiiiiiiiimiiiiiiiimniilll!'  '' 


A.G.S PALDING  &  BROS. 

;•..„       MAINTAIN  THEIR  OWN  HOUSES    " '•) 

FOR   DISTRIBUTING  THE  ^ 

SPALDING 

^  COMPLETE  LINE  OF        ,  $\ 

ATHLETIC  GOODS 

3>»vi.*..'>.     I"  THE  rOUOWIMQ  CITIES 


HEW  YORK 

T24-Y28  Nuuu  St. 
"''iSaS  Wed  42d  St. 
BOSTON.  MASS. 

141  Federal  Street 
PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 

1210  Chestnut  Street 
PrrTSBURG,  PA. 

439  Wood  Street 


CHICAGO 

147-149  WabuhATt. 
ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 

710  Pine  Street 
CINCINNATI,  O. 
119  East  Fifth  Street 
(Opposite  Post  Office) 
CLEVELAND,  O. 

741  Euclid  Avenue 
COLUMBUS,  O. 

191  South  High  Street 
DETROIT,  MICH. 

254  Woodward  Avenue 
MINNEAPOLIS,  MINN. 

38  Sixth  Street,  Sooth 
ST.  PAUL,  MINN. 

386  Minnesota  Street 


SYRACUSE.  N.  T.    . 

Unlvenltj  Block 
BALTIMORE,  MD. 

208  Eut  Baltimore  St. 
WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 
709  14th  Street,  N.W. 
(Colorado  Building) 
NSW  ORLEANS,  LA. 

1 40  Carondeiet  Street 
ATLANTA,  CA. 

74  N.  Brood  Street 
MONTREAL,  CANADA 
443  SI .  James  Street 

LONDON.  ENGLAND  (Three  Stores) 

76,  Cheapslde        317-318,  High  Holborn,  W.  & 

West  End  Branch :  29,  Hajnarket,  S.  W. 

BIRMINGHAM,  ENGLAND 

57,  New  Street 

EDINBURGH,  SCOTLAND 

3  South  Charlotte  Street  (cor.  Prince*  Street) 

SYDNEY,  AUSTRALIA 

228  Clarence  Street 
^WTHcinoii  DIUCTU  TO  A.  o  irALDixo  •  imot..  *T 

AJTT  Or  T»  AMTI  AKUIIUII  will  ICCIITI 

nourr  Arntirnoji 


KANSAS  CITY,  MO. 

1111  Walnut  Street 

DENVER,  COL. 

1616  Arapahoe  Street 

SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL. 

156-158  Geary  Street 
SEATTLE,  WASH. 

71 1  Second  Avenue 


THE  SPALDING  TRADE-MARK  IS  THE 
FOUNDATION  OF  THE  SPALDING  BUSINESS 


Spalding's 


A.  G.  SPALDING 


Anticipating  the  present  ten- 
dency of  the  American  people 
toward  a  healthful  method  of  living 
and  enjoyment,  Spalding's  Athletic 
Library  was  established  in  1892  for 
the  purpose  of  encouraging  ath- 
letics in  every  form,  not  only  by 
publishing  the  official  rules  and 
records  pertaining  to  the  various 
pastimes,  but  also  by  instructing, 
until  to-day  Spalding's  Athletic 
Library  is  unique  in  its  own  par- 
ticular field  and  has  been  conceded 
the  greatest  educational  s_eries  on 
athletic  and  physical  training  sub- 
jects that  has  ever  been  compiled. 
The  publication  of  a  distinct 
series  of  books  devoted  to  athletic 
sports  and  pastimes  and  designed 
to  occupy  the  premier  place  in 
America  in  its  class  was  an  early 
idea  of  Mr.  A.  G.  Spalding,  who 
was  one  of  the  first  in  America 
to  publish  a  handbook  devoted  to 
athletic  sports,  Spalding's  Official 
Base  Ball  Guide  being  the  initial 
number,  which  was  followed  at  intervals  with  other  handbooks  on  the 
sports  prominent  in  the  '70s. 

Spalding's  Athletic  Library  has  had  the  advice  and  counsel  of  Mr.  A.  G. 
Spalding  in  all  of  its  undertakings,  and  particularly  in  all  books  devoted 
to  the  national  game.  This  applies  especially  to  Spalding's  Official 
Base  Ball  Guide  and  Spalding's  Official  Base  Ball  Record,  both  of  which 
receive  the  personal  attention  of  Mr.  A.  G.  Spalding,  owing  to  his  early 
connection  with  the  game  as  the  leading  pitcher  of  the  champion  Boston 
and  Chicago  teams  of  1872-76.  His  interest  does  not  stop,  however,  with 
matters  pertaining  to  base  ball;  there  is  not  a  sport  that  Mr.  Spalding 
does  not  make  it  his  business  to  become  familiar  with,  and  that  the 
Library  will  always  maintain  its  premier  place,  with  Mr.  Spalding's  able 
counsel  at  hand,  goes  without  saying. 

The  entire  series  since  the  issue  of  the  first  number  has  been  under 
the  direct  personal  supervision  of  Mr.  James  E.  Sullivan,  President 
of  the  American  Sports  Publishing  Company,  and  _  the  total  series  of 
consecutive  numbers  reach  an  aggregate  of  considerably  over  three 
hundred,  included  in  which  are  many  "annuals,"  that  really  constitute 
the  history  of  their  particular  sport  in  America  year  by  year,  back  copies 
of  which  are  even  now  eagerly  sought  for,  constituting  as  they  do  the 
really  first  authentic  records  of  events  and  official  rules  that  have  ever 
been  consecutively  compiled. 

When  Spalding's  Athletic  Library  was  founded,  seventeen  years  ago, 
track  and  field  athletics  were  practically  unknown  outside  the  larger 
colleges  and  a  few  athletic  clubs  in  the  leading  cities,  which  gave  occa- 
sional meets,  when  an  entry  list  of  250  competitors  was  a  subject  of  com- 
ment; golf  was  known  only  by  a  comparatively  few  persons;  lawn  tennis 
had  some  vogue  and  base  ball  was  practically  the  only  established  field 


EnrTORS  OF  SPALDIXC/S  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 

sport,  and  that  in  a  professional  way;  basket  ball  had  just  been  invented; 
athletics  for  the  schoolboy — and  schoolgirl— were  almost  unknown,  and 
an  advocate  of  class  contests  in  athletics  in  the  schools  could  not  get  a 
hearing.  To-day  we  find  the  greatest  body  of  athletes  in  the  world  is 
the  Public  Schools  Athletic  League  of  Greater  New  York,  which  has  had 
an  entry  list  at  its  annual  games  of  over  two  thousand,  and  in  whose 
"elementary  series"  in  base  ball  last  year  106  schools  competed  for  the 
trophy  emblematic  of  the  championship. 

While  Spalding's  Athletic  Library  cannot  claim  that  the  rapid  growth 
of  athletics  in  this  country  is  due  to  It  solely,  the  fact  cannot  be  denied 
that  the  books  have  had  a  great  deal  to  do  with  its  encouragement,  by 
printing  the  official  rules  and  instructions  for  playing  the  various  games 
at  a  nominal  price,  within  the  reach  of  everyone,  with  the  sole  object 
that  its  series  might  be  complete  and  the  one  place  where  a  person 
could  look  with  absolute  certainty  for  the  particular  book  in  which  he 
might  be  interested. 

In  selecting  the  editors  and  writers  for  the  various  books,  the  lead- 
ing authority  in  his  particular  line  has  been  obtained,  with  the  result 
that  no  collection  of  books  on  athletic  subjects  can  compare  with 
Spalding's  Athletic  Library  for  the  prominence  of  the  various  authors 
and  their  ability  to  present  their  subjects  in  a  thorough  and  practical 
manner. 

A  short  sketch  of  a  few  of  those  who  have  edited  some  of  the  lead- 
ing numbers  of  Spalding's  Athletic  Library  is  given  herewith : 


JAMES  E.  SULLIVAN 

President  American  Sports  Publishing  Com- 
pany; entered  the  publishing  house  of  Frank 
Leslie  in  1878,  and  has  been  connected  continu- 
ously with  the  publishing  business  since  then 
and  also  as  athletic  editor  of  various  New 
York  papers;  was  a  competing  athlete;  one  of 
the  organizers  of  the  Amateur  Athletic  Union 
of  the  United  States;  has  been  actively  on  its 
board  of  governors  since  its  organization  until 
the  present  time,  and  President  for  two  suc- 
cessive terms;  has  attended  every  champion- 
ship meeting  in  America  since  1879  and  has  officiated  in  some  capacity  in 
connection  with  American  amateur  championships  track  and  field  games 
for  nearly  twenty-five  years;  assistant  American  director  Olympic  Games, 
Paris,  1900;  director  Pan- American  Exposition  athletic  department,  1901; 
chief  department  physical  culture  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition,  St. 
Louis,  1904;  secretary  American  Committee  Olympic  Games,  at  Athens. 
1906;  honorary  director  of  Athletics  at  Jamestown  Exposition,  1907;  secre- 
tary American  Committee  Olympic  Games,  at  London,  1908;  member  of 
the  Pastime  A.  C.,  New  York:  honorary  member  Missouri  A.  C.,St  Louis; 
honorary  member  Olympic  A.  C.,  San  Francisco;  ex-president  Pastime 
A.  C.,  New  Jersey  A.  C.,  Knickerbocker  A.  C.;  president  Metrofolitan 
Association  of  the  A.  A.  U.  for  fifteen  years;  president  Outdoor  Recrea- 
tion League;  with  Dr.  Luther  H.  Gulick  organized  the  Public  Schools 
Athletic  League  of  New  York,  and  is  now  chairman  of  its  games  commit- 
tee and  member  executive  committee;  was  a  pioneer  in  playground  work 
and  one  of  the  organizers  of  the  Outdoor  Recreation  League  of  New  York ; 
appointed  by  President  Roosevelt  as  special  commissioner  to  the  Olympic 
Games  at  Athens,  1906,  and  decorated  by  King  George  I.  of  the  Hellenes 
(Greece)  for  his  services  in  connection  with  the  Olympic  Games;  ap- 
pointed special  commissioner  by  President  Roosevelt  to  the  Olympic 
Game*  at  London.  1908;  appointed  by  Mayor  McClellan,  1908,  as  member 
of  the  Board  of  Education  of  Greater  New  York. 


EDITORS  OF  SPALDING'S  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 


WALTER  CAMP 

For  quarter  of  a  century  Mr.  Walter  Camp 
of  Yale  has  occupied  a  leading:  position  in  col- 
lege athletics.  It  is  immaterial  what  organiza- 
tion is  suggested  for  college  athletics,  or  for 
the  betterment  of  conditions,  insofar  as  college 
athletics  is  concerned,  Mr.  Camp  has  always 
played  an  important  part  in  its  conferences, 
and  the  great  interest  in  and  high  plane  of 
college  sport  to-day,  are  undoubtedly  due  more 
to  Mr.  Camp  than  to  any  other  individual.  Mr. 
Camp  has  probably  written  more  on  college 
athletics  than  any  other  writer  and  the  leading:  papers  and  maga- 
zines of  America  are  always  anxious  to  secure  his  expert  opinion  on  foot 
ball,  track  and  field  athletics,  base  ball  and  rowing:.  Mr.  Camp  has  grown 
up  with  Yale  athletics  and  is  a  part  of  Yale's  remarkable  athletic  system. 
While  he  has  been  designated  as  the  "Father  of  Foot  Ball,"  it  is  a  well 
known  fact  that  during  his  college  career  Mr.  Camp  was  regarded  as  one 
of  the  best  players  that  ever  represented  Yale  on  the  base  ball  field,  so 
when  we  hear  of  Walter  Camp  as  a  foot  ball  expert  we  must  also  remem- 
ber his  remarkable  knowledge  of  the  game  of  base  ball,  of  which  he  is  a 
great  admirer.  Mr.  Camp  has  edited  Spalding's  Official  Foot  Ball  Guide 
since  it  was  first  published,  and  also  the  Spalding  Athletic  Library  book 
on  How  to  Play  Foot  Ball.  Ther«  is  certainly  no  man  in  American  college 
life  better  qualified  to  write  for  Spalding's  Athletic  Library  than  Mr. 
Camp. 


DR.  LUTHER   HALSEY  GULICK 

The  leading:  exponent  of  physical  training: 
in  America;  one  who  has  worked  hard  to  im- 
press the  value  of  physical  training  in  the 
schools;  when  physical  training  was  combined 
with  education  at  the  St.  Louis  Exposition  in 
1904  Dr.  Gulick  played  an  important  part  in 
that  congress;  he  received  several  awards  for 
his  good  work  and  had  many  honors  conferred 
upon  him;  he  is  the  author  of  a  great  many 
books  on  the  subject;  it  was  Dr.  Gulick,  who, 
acting  on  the  suggestion  of  James  E.  Sullivan. 
organized  the  Public  Schools  Athletic  League  of  Greater  New  York,  and 
was  its  first  Secretary;  Dr.  Gulick  was  also  for  several  years  Director  of 
Physical  Training:  in  the  public  schools  of  Greater  New  York,  resigning: 
the  position  to  assume  the  Presidency  of  the  Playground  Association  of 
America.  Dr.  Gulick  is  an  authority  on  all  subjects  pertaining:  to  phys- 
ical training:  and  the  study  of  the  child. 


JOHN    B.   FOSTER 

Successor  to  the  late  Henry  Chadwick 
("Father  of  Base  Ball")  as  editor  of  Spald- 
ing's Official  Base  Ball  Guide;  sporting  editor 
of  the  New  York  Evening  Telegram;  has 
been  in  the  newspaper  business  for  many 
years  and  is  recognized  throughout  America 
as  a  leading  writer  on  the  national  game;  a 
staunch  supporter  of  organized  base  ball, 
his  pen  has  always  been  used  for  the  better- 
ment of  the  game. 


EDITORS  OF  SPALD1NG*  S  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 


TIM    MURNANE 

Base  Ball  editor  of  the  Boston  Globe  and 
President  of  the  New  England  League  of 
Base  Ball  Clubs;  one  of  the  best  known  base 
ball  men  of  the  country;  known  from  coast 
to  coast;  is  a  keen  follower  of  the  game  and 
prominent  in  all  its  councils;  nearly  half  a 
century  aero  was  one  of  America's  foremost 
players:  knows  the  game  thoroughly  and 
writes  from  the  point  of  view  both  of  player 
and  an  official. 


HARRY  PHILIP  BURCHELL 

Sporting  editor  of  the  New  York  Times; 
graduate  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania; 
editor  of  Spalding'a  Official  Lawn  Tennis 
Annual;  is  an  authority  on  the  game;  follows 
the  movements  of  the  players  minutely  and 
understands  not  only  tennis  but  all  other  sub- 
jects that  can  be  classed  as  athletics;  no  one 
is  better  qualified  to  edit  this  book  than  Mr. 
Burchell. 


GEORGE    T.    HEPBRON 

Former  Yountr  Men's  Christian  Association 
director;  for  many  years  an  official  of  the 
Athletic  League  of  Young  Men's  Christian 
Associations  of  North  America ;  was  con- 
nected with  Dr.  Luther  H.  Gulick  in  Young 
Men's  Christian  Association  work  for  over 
twelve  years;  became  identified  with  basket 
ball  when  it  was  in  its  infancy  and  has  fol- 
lowed it  since,  being  recognized  as  the  lead- 
ing exponent  of  the  official  rules;  succeeded 
Dr.  Gulick  as  editor  of  the  Official  Basket  Ball 

Guide  and  also  editor  of  the  Spalding  Athletic  Library  book  on  How  to 

Play  Basket  Ball. 


JAMES  S.    MITCHEL 

Former  champion  weight  thrower;  holder 
of  numerous  records,  and  is  the  winner  of 
more  championships  than  any  pthej  individual 
in  the  history  of  sport ;  Mr.  Mitchel  is  a  close 
student  of  athletics  and  well  qualified  to  write 
upon  any  topic  connected  with  athletic  sport ; 
has  been  for  years  on  the  staff  of  the  New 
York  Sun. 


EDITORS  OF  SPALDING'S  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 


MICHAEL  C.    MURPHY 

The  world's  most  famous  athletic  trainer; 
the  champion  athletes  that  he  has  developed 
for  track  and  field  sports,  foot  ball  and  base  ball 
fields,  would  run  into  thousands;  he  became 
famous  when  at  Yale  University  and  has 
been  particularly  successful  in  developing 
what  might  be  termed  championship  teams; 
his  rare  good  judgment  has  placed  him  in  an 
enviable  position  in  the  athletic  world;  now 
with  the  University  of  Pennsylvania ;  dur- 
ing his  career  has  trained  only  at  two  col- 
leges and  one  athletic  club,  Yale  and  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania  and  Detroit  Athletic  Club;  his  most  recent 
triumph  was  that  of  training  the  famous  American  team  of  athletes 
that  swept  the  field  at  the  Olympic  Games  of  1908  at  London. 


DR.  C.  WARD  CRAMPTON 

Succeeded  Dr.  Gulick  as  director  of  physical 
training  in  the  schools  of  Greater  New  York: 
as  secretary  of  the  Public  Schools  Athletic 
League  is  at  the  head  of  the  most  remarkable 
organization  of  its  kind  in  the  world;  is  a 
practical  athlete  and  gymnast  himself,  and 
has  been  for  years  connected  with  the  physi- 
cal training  system  in  the  schools  of  Greater 
New  York,  having  had  charge  of  the  High 
School  of  Commerce. 


DR.  GEORGE  J.  FISHER 

Has  been  connected  with  Y.  M.  C.  A.  work 
for  many  years  as  physical  director  at  Cincin- 
nati and  Brooklyn,  where  he  made  such  a  high 
reputation  as  organizer  that  he  was  chosen  to 
succeed  Dr.  Luther  H.  Gulick  as  Secretary  of 
the  Athletic  League  of  Y.  M.  C.  A.'s  of  North 
America,  when  the  latter  resigned  to  take 
charge  of  the  physical  training  in  the  Public 
Schools  of  Greater  New  York. 


DR.  GEORGE   ORTON 

On  athletics,  college  athletics,  particularly 
track  and  field,  foot  ball,  soccer  foot  ball,  and 
training  of  the  youth,  it  would  be  hard  to  find 
one  better  qualified  than  Dr.  Orton;  has  had 
the  necessary  athletic  experience  and  the 
ability  to  impart  that  experience  intelligently 
to  the  youth  of  the  land;  for  years  was  the 
American,  British  and  Canadian  champion 
runner. 


EDITORS  OF  SPALDING'S  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 


FREDERICK  R.  TOOMBS 

A  well  known  authority  on  skating:,  rowing, 
boxing,  racquets,  and  other  athletic  sports; 
was  sporting  editor  of  American  Press  Asso- 
ciation. New  York;  dramatic  editor:  is  a  law- 
yer and  has  served  several  terms  as  a  member 
of  Assembly  of  the  legislature  of  the  State  of 
New  York;  has  written  several  novels  and 
historical  works. 


R.   L.  WELCH 

A  resident  of  Chicago:  the  popularity  of 
Indoor  base  ball  is  chiefly  due  to  his  efforts; 
a  player  himself  of  no  mean  ability:  a  first- 
class  organizer:  he  haa  followed  the  game  of 
indoor  base  ball  from  its  inception. 


DR.  HENRY  S.  ANDERSON 

Has  been  connected  with  Yale  University 
for  years  and  is  a  recognized  authority  on 
gymnastics:  is  admitted  to  be  one  of  the  lead- 
ing authorities  in  America  on  gymnastic  sub- 
jects; is  the  author  of  many  books  on  physical 
training. 


CHARLES    M.   DANIELS 

Just  the  man  to  write  an  authoritative 
book  on  swimming;  the  fastest  swimmer  the 
world  has  ever  known;  member  New  York 
Athletic  Club  swimming  team  and  an  Olym- 
pic champion  at  Athens  in  1906  and  London. 
1908.  In  hia  book  on  Swimming,  Champion 
Daniels  describes  just  the  methods  one  must 
use  to  become  an  expert  swimmer. 

GUSTAVE   BOJUS 

Mr.  Bojus  is  most  thoroughly  qualified  to 
write  intelligently  on  all  subjects  pertaining 
to  gymnastics  and  athletics;  in  his  day  one 
of  America's  most  famous  amateur  athletes; 
has  competed  successfully  in  gymnastics  and 
many  other  sports  for  the  New  York  Turn 
Verein:  for  twenty  years  he  has  been  prom- 
inent in  teaching  gymnastics  and  athletics; 
was  responsible  for  the  famous  gymnastic 
championship  teams  of  Columbia  University; 
now  with  the  Jersey  City  high  schools. 


EDITORS  OF  SPALDING'S  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 


CHARLES    JACOBUS 

Admitted  to  be  the  "Father  of  Roque;" 
one  of  America's  most  expert  players,  win- 
ning: the  Olympic  Championship  at  St.  Louis 
in  1904;  an  ardent  supporter  of  the  game 
and  follows  it  minutely,  and  much  of  the 
success  of  roque  is  due  to  his  untiring  efforts: 
certainly  there  is  no  one  better  qualified  to 
write  on  this  subject  than  Mr.  Jacobus. 


DR.  E.  B.  WARMAN 

Well  known  as  a  physical  training  expert; 
was  probably  one  of  the  first  to  enter  the  feld 
and  is  the  author  of  many  books  on  the  sub- 
ject; lectures  extensively  each  year  all  over 
the  country. 


W.  J.  CROMIE 

Now  with  the  University  of  Pennsylvania; 
was  formerly  a  Y.  M.  C.  A.  physical  director; 
a  keen  student  of  all  gymnastic  matters:  the 
author  of  many  books  on  subjects  pertaining 
to  physical  training. 


G.    M.    MARTIN 

By  profession  a  physical  director  of  the 
Young  Men's  Christian  Association;  a  close 
student  of  all  things  gymnastic,  and  games 
for  the  classes  in  the  gymnasium  or  clubs. 


PROF.  SENAC 

A  leader  in  the  fencing  world ;  has  main- 
tained a  fencing  school  in  New  York  for 
years  and  developed  a  great  many  cham- 
pions ;  understands  the  science  of  fencing 
thoroughly  and  the  benefits  to  be  derived 
therefrom. 


SPALDING   ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 

Q\  Giving  the  Titles  of  all  Spalding  Athletic  Library  Books  now 
it  v    in  print,  grouped  for  ready  reference 

SPALDING  OFFICIAL  ANNUALS 

No.      I    Spalding's  Official  Base  Ball  Guide 

No.  IA   Spalding's  Official  Base  Ball  Record 

No.     2    Spalding's  Official  Foot  Ball  Guide 

No.  2A    Spalding's  Official  Soccer  Foot  Ball  Guide 

No.    3    Spalding's  Official  Cricket  Guide 

No.    4    Spalding's  Official  Lawn  Tennis  Annual 

No.     5    Spalding's  Official  Golf  Guide 

No.     6    Spalding's  Official  Ice  Hockey  Guide 

No.    7    Spalding's  Official  Basket  Ball  Guide 

No.    8    Spalding's  Official  Bowling  Guide 

No.     9   Spalding's  Official  Indoor  Base  Ball  Guide 

No.  IO    Spalding's  Official  Roller  Polo  Guide 

No.  12    Spalding's  Official  Athletic  Almanac 

FOOT  BALL  AUXILIARY 

No.  332    Spalding's   Official  Canadian 

Foot  Ball  Guide. 

Group  ill.  cricket 

No.  3  Spalding's  Official  Cricket  Guide. 
No.  277    Cricket  and  How  to  Play  It. 

Group  IV.  Lawi  I  emus 

No.  4  Spalding's  Official  Lawn  Ten- 
nis Annual. 

No.  157    How  to  Play  Lawn  Tennis. 

No.  279  Strokes  and  Science  of  Lawn 
Tennis. 

GroiB  \.  Colt 

No.     6    Spalding's  Official  Golf  Guide 
No.  276    How  to  Play  Golf . 

Group  VI.  Hockei 

No.     6    Spalding's  Official  Ice  Hockey 

Guide. 

No.  304    How  to  Play  Ice  Hockey. 
No.  154    Field  Hockey. 

(Lawn  Hockey. 
No.  188  <  Parlor  Hockey. 

(Garden  Hockey. 
No.  180    Ring  Hockey. 

HOCKEY  AUXILIARY 
No.  256    Official     Handbook    Ontario 
Hockey  Association. 

Group  VII.  Basket  Bail 

No.  7  Spalding's  Official  Basket 
Ball  Guide. 

No.  193    How  to  Play  Basket  Ball. 

No.  318  Basket  Ball  Guide  for  Women. 
BASKET  BALL  AUXILIARY 

No.  323  Official  Collegiate  Basket  Ball 
Handbook. 


No.  1 

No.  202 

No.  223 
No.  232 
No.  230 
No.  229 
No.  225 
No.  226 
No.  227 
No.  228 
No.  224 


No. 
231. 


Base  Ball 

Spalding's  Official  Base  Ball 

Guide. 

How  to  Play  Base  Ball. 
How  to  Bat. 
How  to  Run  Bases. 
How  to  Pitch. 
How  to  Catch. 
How  to  Play  First  Base. 
How  to  Play  Second  Base. 
How  to  Play  Third  Base. 
How  to  Play  Shortstop. 
How  to  Play  the  Outfield. 
How  to  Organize  a  Base  Ball 
Club.  [League. 

How  to  Organize  a  Base  Ball 
How  to  Manage  a  Base  Ball 

Club. 

How  toTrain  aBaseBallTeam 
How  to  Captain  a  Base  Ball 
How  to  Umpire  a  Game.  [Team 
Technical  Base  Ball  Terms. 
No.  219.    Ready  Reckoner  of  Base  Ball 

Percentages. 

BASE  BALL  AUXILIARIES 
No.  1A    Official  Base  Ball  Record. 
No.  319   Minor  League  BaseBallGuide 
No.  320   Official  Book  National  League 

of  Prof.  Base  Ball  Clubs. 
No.  821     Official    Handbook    National 
Playground  Ball  Assn. 

II.  Foot  Ball 

No.     2    Spalding's  Official  Foot  Ball 

Guide. 

No.  334    Code  of  the  Foot  Ball  Rules. 
No.  824    How  to  Play  Foot  Ball. 
No.  2A   Spalding's  Official  Soccer  Foot 

Ball  Guide. 
No.  286    How  to  Play  Soccer. 


cro* 


ANY  OF  THE  ABOVE  BOOKS  MAILED  POSTPAID  UPON  RECEIPT  OF  10  CENTS 


Group  vili.                  Bowling 

No.     8    Spalding's    Official    Bowling 

GrouDXill              Alllleflc 
Accomplishments 

Guide. 

No.  177    How  to  Swim. 

Group  IX.         indoor  Base  Ball 

No.  2%    Speed  Swimming. 

No.  9    Spalding's  Official  Indoor  Base 

No.  128    How  to  Row. 
No.  209    How  to  Become  a  Skater. 

Ball  Guide. 

No.  178    How  to  Train  for  Bicycling. 

Group  X.                         Polo 

No.   23    Canoeing. 

No.    10    Spalding's  Official  Roller  Polo 
Guide. 

No.  282    Roller  Skating  Guide. 

Group  XIV.            Manig  sports 

No.  129    Water  Polo. 
No.  199    Equestrian  Polo. 

No.    18    Fencing.    (  By  Breck.) 
No.  162    Boxing. 

Group  XI.     Miscellaneous  Games 

No.  165    Fencing.    (  By  Senac.) 
No.  140    Wrestling. 

No.  261    Lacrosse. 

No.  236    How  to  Wrestle. 

No.  322    Official  Handbook  U.  S.  Inter- 
collegiate Lacrosse  League. 

No.  102    Ground  Tumbling. 
No.  233    Jiu  Jitsu. 

No.  248    Archery. 

No.  166    How  to  Swing  Indian  Clubs. 

No.  138    Croquet. 

No.  200    Dumb  Bell  Exercises. 

No.  271    Roque. 

No.  143    Indian  Clubs  and  Dumb  Bells. 

(Racquets. 

No.  262    Medicine  Ball  Exercises. 

No.  194  -<  Squash-Racquets. 

No.   29    Pulley  Weight  Exercises. 

(Court  Tennis. 

No.  191    How  to  Punch  the  Bag. 

No.    13    Hand  Ball. 

No.  289    Tumbling  for  Amateurs. 

No.  167    Quoits. 

No.  326    Professional  Wrestling. 

No.  170    Push  Ball. 
No.    14    Curling. 

Group  XV.                Gymnastics 

No.  207    Lawn  Bowls. 

No.  104    Grading  of  Gymnastic  Exer- 

No. 188    Lawn  Games. 

cises.      [Dumb  Bell  Drills. 

No.  189    Children's  Gamea. 

No.  214    Graded  Calisthenics  and 

Group  Xll.                  Atlletlcs 

No.  254    Barnjum  Bar  Bell  Drill. 
No.  158    Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gym- 

No.   12    Spalding's    Official    Athletic 
Almanac. 

nastic  Games. 
No.  124    How  to  Become  a  Gymnast. 

No.   27    College  Athletics. 

No.  287    Fancy  Dumb  Bell  and  March- 

No. 182    All  Around  Athletics. 

ing  Drills.         [Apparatus. 

No.  156    Athletes'  Guide. 

No.  327    Pyramid    Building    Without 

No.    87    Athletic  Primer. 

No.  328    Exercises  on  the  Parallel  Bars. 

No.  273   Olympic  GamesatAthens.1906 
No.  252    How  to  Sprint. 

No.  329    Pyramid     Building    with 
Wands,  Chairs  and  Ladders 

No.  255    How  to  Run  100  Yards. 

GYMNASTIC   AUXILIARY 

No.  174    Distance  and  Cross  Country 

No.  333    Official  Handbook  I.  C.  A.  A. 

Running.               [Thrower. 

Gymnasts  of  America. 

No.  259    How   to    Become   a   Weight 
No.    55    Official  Sporting  Rules,  [boys. 
No.  246    Athletic  Training  for  School- 

Group  XVI.         Physical  culture 

No.  161    Ten  Minutes'  Exercise  for 
Busy  Men.                  [giene. 

ATHLETIC  AUXILIARIES 

No.  208    Physical  Education  and  Hy- 

No.  311    Amateur  Athletic  Union  Offi- 

No. 149    Scientific   Physical   Training 

cial  Handbook.            [book. 

and  Care  of  the  Body. 

No.  316    Intercollegiate  Official  Hand- 

No.  142    Physical  Training  Simplified. 

No.  302    Y.  M.  C.  A.  Official  Handbook. 

No.  185    Hints  on  Health. 

No.  313    Public  Schools  Athletic 

No.  213    285  Health  Answers. 

League  Official  Handbook. 

No.  238    Muscle  Building.            [ning. 

No.  314    Public  Schools  Athletic 

No.  234    School  Tactics  and  Maze  Run- 

League  Official  Handbook 

No.  261    Tensing  Exercises,    [nasties. 

—  Girls'  Branch. 

No.  285    Health    by   Muscular   Gym- 

No.  308     Official  Handbook  New  York 

No.  288    Indigestion  Treated  by  Gym- 

Inter  scholastic  Athletic 

No.  290    Get  Well:  Keep  Well,  [nasties. 

Association. 

No.  325    Twenty-Minute  Exercises. 

No.  317    Marathon  Running. 

No.  330    Physical    Training    for    the 

No.  331    Schoolyard  Athletics. 

School  and  Class  Room. 

ANY  OF  THE  ABOVE  BOOKS  MAILED  POSTPAID  UPON  RECEIPT  OF  10  CENTS 


SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 


Group  I.      Base  Ball 

Official 

The  leading  Base  Ball 
mnual  of  the  country,  and 
Ithe  official  authority  of 
I  the  game.  Contains  the 
(official  playing  rule*,  with 
I  an  explanatory  index  of  the 
I  rales  compiled  by  Mr.  A.  G. 
ISpalding:  pictures  of  sll 
the  team*  in  the  National. 
American  and  minor  league* :  re- 
view* of  the  season:  college  Base  Ball. 
and  a  great  deal  of  interesting  in- 
formation. Price  10  cents. 
No.  202— How  to  Play  Base 

Edited  by  Tim  Humane.  New  and 
revised  edition.  Illustrated  with  pic- 
tures ihowing  how  all  the  various 
curves  and  drops  are  thrown  and  por- 
trait* of  leading  player*.  Price  10  cent*. 
No.  223— How  to  Bat. 

There  i*  no  better  way  of  becoming 
a  proficient  batter  than  by  reading  this 
book  and  practising  the  directions. 
Numerous  illustrations.  Price  10 cents. 
No.  232— How  to  Hua  the 

This  book  gives  dear  and  concise 
directions  for  excelling  a*  a  base  run- 
ner: tells  when  to  run  and  when  not  to 
do  so:  how  and  when  to  slide:  team 
work  on  the  base*:  in  fact  every  point 
of  the  game  i*  thoroughly  explained. 
Illustrated.  Price  10  cents. 
No.  230— HoW  to  Pitch. 

A  new.  u  p-to-date  book.  It*  content* 
are  the  practical  teaching  of  men  who 
have  reached  the  top  a*  pitcher*,  and 
who  know  how  to  impart  a  knowledge 
of  their  art.  All  the  big  league*' 
pitchers  are  shown.  Price  10  cent*. 

No.   229— How    to   Catch. 

Every  boy  who  ha*  hope*  of  being  a 
clever  catcher  should  read  how  well- 
known  player*  cover  their  position. 
Pictures  of  all  the  noted  catcher*  in 
the  big  leagues.  Price  10  cent*. 


No.  22»— Ho 


The  idea*  of  the  best  second  basemen 
have  been  incorporated  In  this  book  for 
the  especial  benefit  of  boy*  who  want 
to  know  the  fine  points  of  play  at  this 
pointofthediamond.  Price  10  cent*. 


Third  base  la.  in  some  respect*,  the 
nvj*t  important  of  the  inneld.    All  the 
points  explained.    Price  10  cent*. 
No.  22A— How  to  Play  Short- 
atop. 

Shortstop  I*  one  of  the  hardest  posi- 
tion* on  the  Inneld  to  fill,  and  quick 
thought  and  quick  action  are  necessary 
for  a  player  who  expects  to  make  good 
aj  »  shortstop.  Illus.  Price  10  cent*. 
No.  224— How  lo  IMny  the 
Ontneld. 


No.  231— Mow  to  Coach  l  How 

to  Mnnnitr  a  Tea  mi  How 
to  I'nsplrei  How  to  Or- 
ganise •  l.fmnuf.  Tech- 
nical Term*  of  Base  Ball. 

-A  useful  guide.    Price  10  cent*. 


No    21i>— I 


Hi. 


To  supply  a  demand  for  a  book  wl.ich 
would  show  the  percentage  of  clubs 
without  recourse  to  the  arduous  work  of 
nguring.thepul>li»hei>  had  these  tables 
compiled  by  an  expert  Price  10  centa. 

B»SE    BALL    AUXILIARIES. 
No.    1A  —  Spaldlnc's    Official 
Base  Ball   Hecord. 

Something  new  in  Base  Ball.  Con- 
tains records  of  all  kinds  from  the  be- 
ginning of  the  Nf  tional  League  and 
official  average*  of  all  professional  or- 
ganizations for  past  season.  10  cents. 
No.  :tlB—  Minor  League  Base 
Ball  Guide. 

The  minors'  own  guide.    Edited  by 
President  T.  H.  Murnsne.  of  the  New 
England  League.    Price  10  centa. 
No.    32<»—  Official     Handbook 
•  >i      Hi.-      \:ni..iml      l.euuiie 
of  Profc»loiinl  liane  Dull 
Clubs. 

Contains  the  Constitution.  By-Laws. 
Official  Rules.  Averages,  and  schedule 
of  the  National  League  for  the  current 
year,  together  with  list  of  club  officers 
and  report*  of  the  annual  meetings  of 
the  League.  Price  10  cent*. 

Co.  321— Official  Handbook 
National  IMayicrouiiU  Hull 
Association. 

This  game  is  specially  adapted  for 
playgrounds,  parks,  etc..  is  spreading 
rapidly.  The  book  contains  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  game,  rules  and  officers. 
Price  10  cents. 


Group  II.     Foot  Ball 

2—  Smildlnic'ii       Official 
t    Ball    Guide. 

Edited  by  Walter  Camp. 
Containi  the  new  rules. 
with  diagram  of  field:  All- 
America  team*  as  selected 
by  the  leading  authorities: 
review*  of  the  game  from 
various  sections  of  the 
country:  score*:  picture*. 
Price  10  cent*. 
No.  334— Code  of  the  Foot 

Ball    Kui.  .. 

Thi*  book  i*  meant  for  the  use  of 
Official*,  to  help  them  to  refresh  their 
memories  before  a  game  and  to  afford 
them  a  quick  means  of  ascertaining  a 
point  during  a  game.  It  also  gives  a 
ready  means  of  finding  a  rule  in  the 
Official  Rule  Book,  and  is  of  great  help 
to  a  player  in  studying  the  Rulrs. 
Compiled  by  C.  W.  Short.  Harvard.  1908. 
Price  10  cent*.  ^ 

No.    324— How    to    Play    Foot 
Rail. 

Edited  by  Walter  Camp,  of  Yale. 
Everything  that  a  beginner  want*  to 
know  and  many  point*  that  an  expert 
will  be  glad  to  learn.  Snapshot*  of 
leading  teams  and  players  In  action, 
with  comment*  by  Walter  Camp. 
Price  10  cent*. 

No.      2A-Spalill»r'»      Offlrlal 
Association     Soc< 

n  .11    '.ui.1. 
A  complete  and   up-to- 
date  guide  to  the  "Soo 
game  in  the  United  States 
containing  instruction 
playing  IN*  game,  official 
rule*,  and  interesting 
news  from  all  part*  of  the 
country.  Illustrated.  Price 
10  centa. 


Soe- 


How  each  position  should  be  played, 
written  by  the  best  player  in  England 
in  his  respective  position,  and  illus- 
trate) with  full-page  photograph*  of 
player*  in  action.  Price  10  centa. 

FOOT  BALL.   AUXILIARIES. 
No.  333— S|>aldlncr'«)     Old. -lit I 

Canadian          Foot          Ball 

Guide. 

The  official  book  of  the  game  in  Can- 
ada. Price  10  cents. 

Group  III.      Cricket 

Official 


The  most  complete  year 
book  of  the  game  that  haa 
ever  been  published  in 
America.  Report*  of 
special  matches,  official 
rule*  and  picture*  of  all 
the  leading  team*.  Price 
10  centa. 


No.    277-Crlcketi    and    How 
to    Play    It. 

By  Prince  Ranjitsinhji.  The  game 
described  concisely  and  illustrated  with 
f  ull-pape  pictures  posed  especially  for 
this  book.  Price  10  centa. 


Group  IV. 


Lawn 
Tennis 


No.       4— Spaldlntz's       Official 
Lawn  Tennis    Annual. 

Contents  include  reports 
of  sll  important  tourna- 
ment*: official  ranking 
from  H85  to  date:  law*  of 
lawn  tennis:  instructions 
for  handicapping;  deci- 
sions on  doubtful  point*; 

_  ments:  directory  of  clubs: 
uo  ing  out  and  keeping  a  court.  Illus, 
trated.  Price  10  centa. 

No.    1ST— How   to   Play  Lawn 
Tennis. 

A  complete  description  of  lawn  ten- 
nis: a  lesson  for  beginners  and  direc- 
tions telling  how  to  make  the  most  im- 
portant strokes.  Illustrated.  Price 
10  cents. 


By  P.  A.  Vaile.  a  leading  authority 
on  the  game  in  Great  Britain.  Every 
stroke  in  the  game  is  accurately  illus- 
trated and  analyzed  by  the  author. 
Price  10  cent*. 


Group  V. 


Golf 


No.       r>— SpnlfllnB's       Official 
Golf  Guide. 

Contains  records  of  sll 
important  tournaments, 
articles  on  the  game  in 
various  sections  of  the 
country,  pictures  of  pi 
inentplayers.  official  Blay- 
ing  rules  and  general 
Items  of  Interest.  Price 

No.    27O— How    to    Play    Golf. 

By  James  Braid  and  Harry  Vardon. 
the  world's  two  greatest  players  tell, 
how  they  play  the  game,  with  numen 
out  full-page  picture*  of  them  taken. 
on  the  link*.  Price  10  cents. 


SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 


Group  VI.  >  Hockey 

No.  4S»Spaldlng-*s)  Official  Ice 
Hockey  Guide. 

The  official  year  book  of 
the  game.     Contains  the 
cial  rules,  pictures  of 
leading  teams  and  players, 
«ords.    review    of     the 
ason.  reports  from  dif- 
'rent     sections    of     the 
United  Statesand  Canada, 
ce  10  cent*. 

No.  304—  How  to  Ploy  Ice 
Hockey. 

Conjtains  a  description  of  the  duties 
of  each  player.  Illustrated.  Price  10 
cents. 

No.    154— Field    Hockey. 

Prominent  in  the  sports  at  Vassar. 
Smith.  Wellesley.  Bryn  Mawrand  other 
leading  colleges.  Price  10  cents. 

No.  I  - -.  —  I.  :.  n  ii  Hockey. 
Parlor  Hockey,  Garden 
Hockey. 

Containing  the  rules  for  each  game. 
Illustrated.  Price  10  cents. 

No.  180— Ring  Hockey. 

A  new  (fame  for  the  gymnasium. 
Exciting  as  basket  ball.  Price  10 cents. 

HOCKEY    AUXILIARY. 
No.     S3«— Official     Handbook 


Association. 

Contains  the  official  rules  of  the 
Association,  constitution,  rules  of  com- 
petition, list  of  officers,  and  pictures  of 
leading  players.  Price  10  cents. 

_  Basket 

Group  VH.      Ball 

No.        7— Spa  Mine's        Official 

Basket     Hall     Gu 
Edited    by    George    T. 
Hepbron.      Contains    the 
revised  official  rules,  de- 
cisions on  disputed  points. 

teams,  reports  on  the  game 
from  various  parts  of  the 
country.  Illustrated.  Price 
10  cents. 

No.  193— How  to  Play  Basket 
,  Ball. 

By  G.  T.  Hepbron,  editor  of  the 
Official  Basket  Ball  Guide.  Illustrated 
with  scenes  of  action.  Price  10  cents. 

No.  318—  Official   Basket  Ball 
Guide  for  Women. 

Edited  by  Miss  Senda  Berenson.  of 
Smith  College.  Contains  the  official 
playing  rules  and  special  articles  on 
the  game  by  prominent  authorities. 
Illustrated.  Price  10  cents. 

BASKET   BALL    AUXILIARY. 
No.     323— Collesriute     Basket 
jBall     Handbook. 

The  official  publication  of  the  Colle- 
giate Basket  Ball  Association.  Con- 
tains the  official  rules,  records.  All- 
America  selections,  reviews,  and  pic- 
tures. Edited  by  H.  A.  Fisher,  of 
CMumbia.  Price  10  cents. 


Group  VIII.   Bowling 

No.       8—  Spaldlnir'si       Official 
non-Una;     Guide. 

The  contents  include: 
diagrams  of  effective  de- 
liveries; hints  to  begin- 
ners- how  to  score:  official 
rules:  spares,  how  they 
are  made:  rules  for  cocked 
hat.  quintet,  cocked  hat 
and  feather,  battle  game. 
etc.  Price  10  cents. 

__    Indoor 
Group  IX.  Base  Ball 

No.  O—  Spaldlnsr's  Official  In- 

door   Bane   nail    iini.i,-. 
America'snationa!  game 
is  now  vieing  with  other 
indoor  games  as  a  winter 
pastime.    This   book  con- 
playing   rules. 
f  leading  teams. 


- 
bject. 


Polo 


the  game  by  leading 
thorities  on    t 
Price  10  cents. 

Group  X. 

No.      Ill—  Spalding's) 
Official    Roller 
Polo   Guide. 

Edited  by  J.  C.  Morse. 
A  full  description  of  the 
game;  official  rules,  re- 

nent  players.  Price  1C  cents 
o.   129—  Water   Polo. 

The  contents  of  this  book  treat  of 
_  rery  detail,  the  individual  work  of  the 
players,  the  practice  of  the  team,  how 
to  throw  the  ball,  with  illustrations  and 

uable  hints.     Price  10  cents. 
\o.   19!>—  EqncHtrian   Polo. 
Compiled  by  H.  L.  Fitzpatrick  of  the 
lew  York  Sun.    Illustrated  with  por- 
•aits  of  leading  players,  and  contains 
lost  useful  information  for  polo  play- 
ers.   Price  10  cents. 

_         ,,_  Miscellane- 
GroupXI.  QUS  Games 

No.  2W1—  Lacrosse. 

Every  position  is  thoroughly  ex- 
plained in  a  most  simple  and  concise 
manner,  rendering  it  the  best  manual 
of  the  frame  ever  published.  Illus- 
trated with  numerous  snapshots  *f  im- 
portant plays.  Price  10  cents. 


Contains  the  constitution,  by-laws, 
playing  rules,  list  of  officers  and  records 
of  the  association.    Price  10  cents. 
No.     271— Spnl.liiig's     Official 
Roque    Guide. 

The  official  publication  of  the  Na- 
tional Roque  Association  of  America. 
Contains  a  description  of  the  courts 
and  their  construction,  diagrams,  illus- 
trations, rules  and  valuable  informa- 
tion. Price  10  cents. 

No.     i:ts— Spnliliiijj's     Official 
Croquet    Guide 

Contains  directions  for  playing,  dia- 
gramsof  important  strokes, description 
of  grounds,  instructions  for  the  begin- 
ner, terms  used  in  the  game,  and  the 
official  playing  rules.  Price  10  cents. 


A  new  and  up-to-date  book  on  this 
fascinating  pastime.  The  several 
varieties  of  archery:  instructions  for 
shooting:  how  to  select  implements; 
how  to  score;  and  a  great  deal  of  inter- 
esting information.  Illustrated.  Price 
10  cents. 


How  to  play  each  game  is  thoroughly 
explained,  and  all  the  difficult  strokes 
shown  by  special  photographs  taken 
especially  for  this  book.  Contains  the 
official  rules  for  each  game.  Price  10 
cents. 
No.  1O7— Qnolts. 

Contains  a  description  of  the  plays 
used  by  experts  and  the  official  rules. 
Illustrated.  Price  10  cents. 

No.    170— Push    Ball. 

This  book  contains  the  official  rules 
and  a  sketch  of  the  game:  illustrated. 
Price  10  cents. 

No.    l.'t-lloiv    to    Play    Hand 
Ball. 

By  the  world's  champion,  Michael 
Egan.  Every  play  is  thoroughly  ex- 
plained by  text  and  diagram.  Illus- 
trated. Price  10  cents. 

No.    14— Cnrllngr. 

A  short  history  of  this  famous  Scot- 
tish pastime,  with  instructions  for 
play,  rules  of  the  game,  definitions  of 
•terms  and  diagrams  of  different  shots. 
Price  10  cents. 

No.      207— Bowline      on      the 
Green;  or,  Lawn  Bon-Is. 

How  to  construct  a  green:   how  to 
play  the  game,  and  the  official  rules 
of  the  Scottish  Bowling  Association. 
Illustrated.    Price  10  cents. 
No.    189— Children's   Games. 

These  games  are  intended  for  use  at 
recesses,  and  all  but  the  team  games 
have  been  adapted  to  large  classes. 
Suitable  for  children  from  three  to 
eight  years,  and  include  a  great  variety. 
Price  10  cents. 

No.    1SS— Lawn   Games. 

Lawn  Hockey.  Garden  Hockey,  Hand 
Tennis.  Tether  Tennis;  also  Volley 
Ball.  Parlor  Hockey.  Badminton.  Bas- 
ket Goal.  Price  10  cents. 

Group  XII.   Athletics 

N 

Compiled  by  J.  E.  Sulli- 

teur  Athletic  Union.  The 
only  annual  publicatioi 
now  issued  that  contain 

best-on-records;  intercol- 1 
legiate.  swimminp.  inter- L 
scholastic.  English.  Irish.  Scotch. 
Swedish.  Continental.  South  African. 
Australasian;  numerous  photos  of  in- 
dividual athletes  and  leading  athletic 
teams.  Price  10  cents. 

No.   27— College    Athletics. 

M.  C.  Murphy,  the  well-known  ath- 
letic trainer,  now  with  Pennsylvania, 
the  author  of  this  book,  has  written  it 
especially  for  the  schoolboy  and  college 
man.  but  it  is  invaluable  for  the  athlete 
who  wishes  to  excel  in  any  branch  of 
athletic  sport;  profusely  illustrated, 
Price  10  cents. 


SPALDBVG 


He.  ^  182—  All-Around       Ath- 

ATHLETIC    AUXILIARIES. 

No.    128—  How    to    Row.        . 

letlca. 

Give*  la  full  the  method  of  scoring 
the  All-Around  Championship:  how  to 
train  for  the  All-Around  Champion- 
ship.   Illustrated.    Prica  10  cents. 

No.    811—  Official     Handbook 
of    the    A.A.U. 

The  A.  A.  U.  1*  the  governing  body 
of  athletes  in  the   United  States  of 
America,  and  all  games  must  be  held 

By  E.  J.  Glannini.  of.  the  New  York 
Athletic  Club,  on*  of  America's  most 
famous  amateur  oarsmen  and  cham- 
pions.   Shows  how  to  hold  the  oars, 
the  finish  of  the  stroke  and  other  valu- 
able information.    Price  10  cents. 

under  its  rules,  which  are  exclusively 

He.    ISO—  Athlete'*    Guide. 

published  in  this  handbook,  and  a  copy 

No.    !«»«—  Speed    Swimming;. 

Full  instructions  for  ths  beginner. 

should  be  in  the  hands  of  every  athlete 

By  Champion  C.  M.  Daniel*  of  the 

telling  how  to  sprint  hurdle,  jump  and 

and   every   club   officer   in   America. 

New  York  Athletic  Club  team,  holder 

Also  includes  a  very  interesting  article 

of  numerous  American  records,  and  the 

ing:  valuable  advice  to  beginners  and 

on  "The  Growth  of  American  Ath- 

best swimmer  in  America  qualified  to 

important  A.  A.  U.  rules  and  their  ex- 

letics," and  a  short  biography  of  each 

write  on  the  subject    Any  boy  should 

planations,  while  the  pictures  comprise 

member  of  the  Board  of  Governors, 

be  able  to  increase  his  speed  in  the 

many  scenes  of  champions  In  action. 

Price  10  cents. 

water  after  reading  Champion  Daniels' 

Price  10  cents. 

No.    31O—  Official    Intereolle- 

Instructions  on  the  subject    Price  10 

He.  273—  The  Olympic  Games 
at  Athena. 

Blnte  A.A.A.A.  Handbook. 

Contains  constitution,  by-laws,  and 

No.  23—  Canoeing;. 

A  complete  account  of  the  Olympic 
Games  of  1*M.  at  Athens,  the  greatest 
International    Athletic   Contest    erer 
held.     Compiled    by   J.    E.   Sullivan. 
Special  United  States  Commissioner  to 
the  Olympic  Games.    Price  10  cents. 

laws  of  athletics:  records  from  1876  to 
date.    Price  10  cents. 

No.     308—  Official     Handbook 
New       York       Interschol- 
«•«!«•      Athletle      Assocla- 
tlon. 

Paddling,  sailing,  cruising  and  rac- 
ing canoes  and  their  uses;  with  hints 
on  rig  and  management;  the  choice  of 
a  canoe;  sailing  canoes,  racing  regula- 
tions: canoeing  and  camping.    Fully 
illustrated.    Price  10  cents. 

Re.  87—  Athletic  Primer. 

Contains  the  Association's  records, 
constitution   and   by-taws  and  other 

No.    209—  How    to    Become    a 
Skater. 

Edited  by  J.  E.  Sullivan.  President 

information.    Price  10  cents. 

Contains  advice  for  beginners;  how 

of  the  Amateur  Athletic  Union.    Tells 
how  to  organize  an  athletic  club,  how 
to  conduct  an  athletic  meeting,  and 

No.      302—  Official       Y.M.C.A. 
Handbook. 

to  become  a  figure  skater,  showing  how 
to  do  all  the  different  tricks  of  the  best 
figure  skaters.    Pictures  of  prominent 

gives  rules  for  the  government  of  ath- 

Contains the  official  rules  governing 

skaters  and  numerous  diagrams.    Price 

letic  meetings:  contents  also  include 

sll  sports  under  the  jurisdiction  of  the 

10  cents. 

directions  for  laying  out  athletic 
grounds,  and  a  very  Instructive  article 

Y.  M.  C.  A.,  official  Y.  M.  C.  A.  scoring 
tables,  pentathlon   rules,  pictures  of 

No.  2*2—  Official  Roller  Skat- 
IIIK  Guide. 

en  training.    Pries  10  cents. 

leading  Y.  M.  C.  A    athletes.    Price 

Directions  for  becoming  a  fancy  and 

No.  202—  How  to  Sprint. 

Every  athlete  who  aspires  to  be  a 

No.     313—  Official     Handbook 
of      the      Public      Schoola 

trick  roller  skater,  and  rules  for  roller 
skating.    Pictures  of  prominent  trick 
skaters  in  action.    Price  10  cents. 

sprinter  can  study  this  book  to  advan- 
tage.   Price  10  cents. 

Athletic   Leau-ne. 

Edited  by  Dr.  C.  Ward  Crampton, 

No.    ITS—  How    to    Train    for 
Bicycling;. 

He.    288—  Hew    te    Ram    1OO 
YareU. 

director  of  physical  education  in  the 
Public  Schools  of  Greater  New  York. 
Illustrated.    Price  10  cents. 

Gives  method*  of   the  best  rider* 
when  training  for  long  or  short  distance 

•7  i.  W.  Morton,  the  noted  British 
champion.      Many    of    Mr.   Morton's 

No.     314-Officlal     Handbook 
Gtrla'       Branch       of       the 

races:  hints  on  training.    Revised  and 
up-to-date  in  every  particular.    Price 
10  cent*. 

American  athletes,  but  his  success  is 
the  best  tribute  to  their  worth.    Illus- 
trated.   Price  10  cents. 

He.  17*—  Distance  and  Cross- 

Public    Schoola     Athletic 
Leairue. 

The  official  publication.    Contains: 
constitution  and"  by-laws,  list  of  offi- 
cers, donors,  founders,  life  and  annual 

_         __.      Manly 
Group  XIV.      sports 

No.    14O—  Wreatllnar. 

country    Ilunnlnu. 

members,    reports  and    illustrations. 

Catch-as-catch-can   style.     Seventy 

%r  George  Orton.  the  famous  Uni- 

Price 10  cents. 

illustrations  of  the  different  holds,  pho- 
tographed especially  and  so  described 

versity  of  Pennsylvania  runner.    The 

No.      331—  Schoolyard.      Ath- 

that  anybody  can  with  little  effort  learn 

quarter,  half.   mile,  the   longer  dis- 
tance*, and  cross-country  running  and 

letlcav 

every  one.    Price  1C  cents. 

steeplechaslng.  with  Instructions  for 

By  J.  E.  Sullivan.  President  Amateur 

No.    IS—  Fencing;. 

training;  pictures  of  leading  athletes 
n  action,  with  comments  by  the  editor. 
Price  10  cants. 

Athletic  Union  and  member  of  Board 
of  Education  of  Greater  New  York.  An 
invaluable  handbook  for  the  teacher 

By  Dr.  Edward  Brack,  of  Boston. 
editor  of   The  Swordsman,  a  promi- 

nent amateur  fencer.    A  book  that  has 

Ho.    2B»—  Weight    Throwing;. 

Probably  no  other  man  in  the  world 
baa  bad  the  varied  and  long  experience 
ef  James  8.  Mltohel.  the  author,  in  the 

plan  for  conducting  school  athletic  con- 
tents and  instructs  how  to  prepare  for 
the  various  events.   Illustrated.    Price 
10  cents. 

stood  the  test  of  time,  and  is  universally 
acknowledged  to  be  a  standard  work. 
Illustrated.    Price  10  cents. 

No.    1O2—  Boxing;   Guide. 

weight  throwing  department  of  ath- 
letics.   The  book  give*  valuable  infor- 
mation not  only  for  the  novice,  but  for 
the  expert  a*  wall.    Price  10  cents. 

No.  317—  Marathon  Running-. 

A  new  and  up-to-date  book  on  this 
popular   pastime.     Contains  pictures 

Con  tains  over  70  pagesof  Illustration* 
showing  all   the  latest  blows,  poaed 
especially  for  this  book  under  the  super- 
vision  of  a  well-known  instructor  of 

,  ,    .  n  .  .    r   H^V**"*1  ry?*rm' 

boxing,  who  mskes  a  specialty  of  teach- 

He.    24O—  Athletle    Training; 

*\       .            rt*M  ^fcl       ttj*          time* 

ing  and   knows   how   to  impart   his 

for  Ichoolbeya. 

Price  10  cents. 

knowledge.    Price  10  cent*. 

By  Ceo,  W.  Orion.  Each  event  in  the 

No.  168—  The  Art  ef  Frnclnc 

ef  separately.    P*rie*  10  cents. 

Group  XI  II.   Athletic 

By  Regis  and  Louis  Senac.  of  New 
York,  famous  instructor*  and  leading- 

•e.     /BO—  Official         Sporting; 

Accomplishments 

authorities  on  the  subject    Gives  In 
detail  how  every  move  should  be  made. 

Contains  rules  not  found  in  other 

No.   ITT—  Hew   to  Swim, 

Price  10  cents. 

publications   for   the  government  of 

Will  interest  the  expert  as  wall  as 

No.    236—  How   to   "Wrestle. 

many    sports;     rule*    for   wrestling, 
atiufleboard.     •nowshosing.      profes- 

the novice;  the  illustrations  were  made 
from    photographs   especially   posed. 

The  most  compete  and  up-to-date 
book    on    wrestling   ever    published. 

sional   racing,    pigeon   shooting,   dog 
racing,  pistol  and  revolver  shooting. 
aVJIieai  water  polo  rules,  Rugby  foot 
UUralee.    PrieelOcenU. 

showing  the  swimmer  in  clear  water. 
a  valuable   feature   is   the   series  of 
"land  drill  "  exerdaea  for  ttw  tocinmr. 
Price  10  cents. 

Edited  by  F.  R.  Toombs.  and  devoted 
principally  to  special  poees  and  Illustra- 
tions by  George  Hackenachmidt  the 

"  Russian  Lion."    Price  10  cenu. 

No.    1O2—  Ground    Tumbling. 

No.     214—  Graded     Call*then- 

No.  2OH—  Physical  Education 

Any  boy.  by  readme  this  book  and 
following  the  instruction!,  can  become 
proficient.    Price  10  cent*. 

lc«  and  Dumb-Bell  Drill*. 

For  years  it  has  been  the  custom  in 

drill,  which  was  never  varied.    Conse- 

and   Hygiene. 

This  is   the   fifth   of   the   Physical 
Training  series,  by  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman 
(see  Nos.  142.  149.  166.  186.  213.  2C1.  290.) 

Mo.  28U—  Tumbling  (or  Ama- 

quently the  beginner  was  given  the 

Price  10  cents. 

teur*. 

Specially  compiled  for  amateun  by 
Dr.  James  T.Gwathmey.  Every  variety 
of  the  pastime  explained  by  text  and 

same  kind  and  amount  as  the  older 
member.    With  a  view  to  giving  uni- 
formity  the   present    treatise   is  at- 
tempted.   Price  10  cents. 

No.  14!>—  The  Careaf  the  Body. 

A  book  that  all  who  value  health 
should  read  and  follow  its  instructions. 
By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.  the  well-known 

pictures,  over  100  different  positions 
being  shown.    Price  10  cents. 

No.    254—  Darn  jam    Bar    Bell 
Drill. 

lecturer  and  authority  on  physical  cul- 
ture.   Price  10  centa. 

No.    i;ii—  HUIT   to   Punch   the 
Bag. 

Edited   by   Dr.  R.  Tait   McKenzie. 
Director  Physical  Training.  University 

No.     142—  Physical    Training 
Simplified. 

The  best  treatise  en  bag  punching 

of  Pennsy  Ivania.  Profusely  illustrated. 
Price  10  cents. 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.  A  complete, 
thorough  and  practical  book  where  the 

riety  of  blow  used  in  training  is  shown 

No.  1B8—  Imloor  and  Outdoor 

whole  man    is  considered—  brain  and 

and  explained,  with  a  chapter  on  fancy 
bag  punching  by  a  well-known  theatri- 

Gymnaatlc   Game*. 

body.    Price  10  cents. 
No.    ISIi—  Health    Hint*. 

cal  bag  puncher.    Price  10  cents. 

dom-'and  outdoor  gymnasiums,  schools. 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.    Health  in- 

No.    143—  Indian    Club*    and 

outings  and  gatherings  where  there 
are  a  number  to  be  amused.    Price  10 

fluenced  by  insulation;    health  influ- 
enced by  underwear:  health  influenced 

,  Dumb-Bella. 

cents. 

by  color:  exercise.    Price  10  cents. 

Br  America's  amateur  champion  club 
swinger.  J.  H.  Dougherty.  It  is  clearly 
illustrated,  by  which  any  novice  can 
become  an  expert.    Price  10  cents. 

No.    124—  How    to    Become    a 
Gymnnat. 

By  Robert  Stoll.  of  the  New  York 

No.  213—283  Health  Answer*. 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.     Content*: 
ventilating  a  bedroom;   ventilating  a 

A.  C..  the  American  champion  on  the 

house:  how  to  obtain  pure  air:  bathing: 

No.   20O—  Dumb-Bell*. 

flying  rings  from  1885  to  1892.  Any  boy 

salt  water  baths  at  home:  a  substitute 

The  best  work  on  dumb-bells  that 
has  ever   been  offered.    By  Prof.  G. 

can   easily  become   proficient  with  a 
little  practice.    Price  10  cents. 

for  ice  water;   to  cure  insomnia,  etc.. 
etc.    Price  10  cent*. 

Bojus.  of   New   York.    Contains   200 

No.     287—  Fancy     Dumb     Bell 

No.   238—  Muscle   Building. 

photographs.    Should  be  in  the  hands 
of  every  teacher  and  pupil  of  physical 
culture,  and    is  invaluable  for  home 

and   Marching  Drill*. 

All  concede  that  games  and  recreative 
exercises  during  the  adolescent  period 

By  Dr.  L.  H.  Gulick.  Director  of  Phy- 
sical Training  in  the  New  York  Public 
Schools.    A  complete  treatise  on  the 

exercise.    Price  10  cents. 

are  preferable  to  set  drills  and  monoton- 

correct method  of  acquiring  strength- 

No.    2O2—  Medicine    Ball    F.i- 

ercl*e*. 

ous  movements.  These  drills,  while  de- 
signed primarily  for  boys,  can  be  used 

Illustrated.     Price  10  centa. 
No.   234—  School   Tactic*   and 

successfully  with  girls  and  men  and 

M»/t-     Kuunlnff. 

A  series  of  plain  and  practical  exer- 
cises with  the  medicine  ball,  suitable 
for  boys  and  girls,  business  and  prof  es- 

women.     Profusely  illustrated.    Price 
10  cents.                y.' 
.\o.  '»S7—  Pyramid      Building 

A  series  of  drills  for  the  use  of  schools. 
Edited  by  Dr.  Luther-  Halsey  Gulick. 
Director  of  Physical  Training  in  the 

P  rice  10  cents. 

Without     ipiinrniiis. 

New  York  Public  Schools.     Price  10 

No.  29—  Puller  Weight  Exer- 

By   W.   J.    Cromie.    Instructor    of 
Gymnastics.    University   of    Pennsyl- 

cents. 
No.    2(11—  Ten*lng    Exerclae*. 

cines. 

vania.      With    illustrations    showing 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.    The  "Ten- 

By Dr.  Henry  S.  Anderson,  instructor 

many    different    combinations.     This 

sing"  or  "Resisting"  system  of  mus- 

in heavy  gymnastics  Yale  gymnasium. 

book  should  be  in  the  hands  of  all  gym- 

cular exercises  is  the  most  thorough. 

In  conjunction  with  a  chest  machine 
anyone    with    this   book    can  become 

nasium  instructors.    Price  10  Cents.  - 

th*  most  complete,  the  most  satisfac- 

perfectly  developed.    Price  10  cents. 

Parallel    Bar*. 

No.  233—  Jin  Jltan. 

By  W.  J.  Cromie.     Every  gymnast 

No.    285—  Health;    by    Muaea- 

Each  move  thoroughly  explained  and 
Illustrated  with    numerous   full-page 

should  procure  a  copy  of  this  book. 
Illustrated  with   cuts  showing  many 

With  hints  on  right  living.  By  W.  J. 

pictures  of  Messrs.  A.  Minami  and  K. 

novel  exercises.    Price  10  cents. 

cises  and   observe   the   hints  therein 

Koyama,  two  of  the  most  famous  ex- 
ponents of  the  art  of  Jiu  Jitsu.  who 
posed  especially  for  this  book.    Price 

No.  321>—  Pyramid      Building 
with    Chair*,   Wand*   and 

contained,  he  will  be  amply  repaid  for 
so  doing.    Price  10  cents. 

10  cents. 

"'Udder*. 

No.  288—  Indigestion  Treated 

By  W.  J.  Cromie.    Illustrated  with 

by    Uymna*tlc* 

No.    16«—  How    to    STrlng    In- 

half-tone photopraphs  showing  many 

By  W.  J.  Cromie.  If  the  hints  there- 

dian   Club*. 

interesting    combinations.      Price    10 

in   contained   are    observed    and    the 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.    By  follow- 

cents. 

exercises  faithfully  performed   great 

ing  the  directions  carefully  anyone  can 
become  an  expert.    Price  10  cents. 

.  GYMNASTIC   AUXILIARY. 
No.     333—  Official     Handbook 

relief  will  be  experienced.     Price  10 
cents. 
No.     2OO—  Get     Well;     Keep 

ling. 

tion     Amateur    Gymna*t* 

Well. 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.  author  of  a 

A  book  devoted  to  the  cateh-as-catch- 
can  style  ;   illustrated  with  half-tone 

Edited  by  P.  R.  Carpenter,  Physical 

number  of  books  in  the  Spalding  Ath- 
letic  Library  on    physical    training. 

pictures  showing  the  different  holds 

Director  Amherst  College.     Contains 

Price  10  cents. 

used  by  Frank  Gotch.  champion  catch- 
as-catch-can    wrestler  of    the  world. 

pictures  of  leading  teams  and  individual 
champions,  official  rules  governing  con- 

No. 325—  Twenty-  Minute  Ex- 

Posed  by  Dr.  Roller  and  Charles  Postl. 

tests,  records.    Price  10  cents. 

erciae*. 

By  Ed.  W.  Smith.  Sporting  Editor  of 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  Warman.  with  chap- 

the Chicago  American.    Price  10  cents. 

ft 

Group  XV.  Gymnastics 

IT.™  Physical 
Group  XVI.  culture 

N.o.  1«1—  Ten  Minute*'   Exer- 

ters on  "  How  to  Avoid  Growing  Old." 
and  "  Pasting  ;  Its  Objects  and  Bene- 
fits."   Price  10  cents. 
No.  330—  Phyalcal      Training 
for   tbe   School  and   Cla** 

Ho.      104—  The      Grading      of 

cise   (or   Busy   Men. 

Koora. 

Gymnastic     Exercise*. 

By  G.  M.  Martin.  A  book  that  should 

By  Dr.  Luther  Halsey  Gulick.  Direc- 
tor of  Physical  Training  in  the  New 

Edited   by  G.  R.  Border.  Physical 
Director  of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.  .  Eas  ton.  Pa. 

be  in  the  hands  of  every  physical  direc- 

York Public  School*.    A  concise  and 

A  book  that  is  for  practical  work  in 

tor  of  th.  V.  M.  C.  A  .  school,  club,  col- 
l*t*.«tc.    Price  10  sen  U. 

complete  court*  of  physical  education. 
Prio*  10  cent*. 

th*  school  room.    Illustrated.    f*i**> 
JO  cent*. 

A     G.    SPALDING 


FROM    PHUTOOKAPH    TAKKM    ij»    SAX 
j.v    NUVEMBEK.    1879 


Indoor 

and 

Outdoor 


Gymnastic  Games 


2  70 


COMPILED  BV 

A.    M.    CHESLEY 

Physical  Director  Orange  Y.M.C.A 


Published  by 

American  Sports  Publishing  Company 

21    WARREN    STREET,    NEW    YORK 


Copyright  1902.  by 

Vmerican  Sport*  Publishing  Comtmnr 

New  York 


f 

Index  4 

70 1 

'•'  '  'C42.i  -•-•• 

PART    I.         ,:,'..  ,'.TJ" 

SIMPLE  GAMES  FOR  A  LARGE  NUMBER. 

PAGE 

Ball    Tossing    Games 19 

Mount    Ball 22 

Bound    Ball 22 

Curtain   Ball    23 

Bombardment    23 

-Mat  Tag  . 24 

All  Run 24 

Spud     24 

Babylonian    25 

Roll    Ball    25 

Medicine  Ball  Passing 25 

Corner  Ball 26 

Captain  or  Centre  Ball 27 

Dodge  Ball  29 

Peg   Driving    29 

Man  Overboard    30 

Knee    Ball 30 

Ball   Hustle   30 

Kick    Ball 31 

TAG  GAMES. 

>  Jskip  Away  31 

'hip  Tag 31 

e  Deep   32 

Prisoner's   Base    33 

Ham,  Ham,  Chicken,  Ham,  Bacon 35 

Puss  in  the  Corner 35 


1701.4 


4  Index 

PAGE 

Group    Play    36 

Garden   Scamp   36 

Link   Chase    37 

Battering  Ram 37 

Day  and  Night 37 

Siege    38 

Running   for   Places 39 

Front   Duty    39 

Bull  in  the  Ring  or  Hare 39 

Black  Man   40 

Tender  Green 40 

Blind    Man's    Buff 40 

Fox    40 

Lame  Goose 41 

Sculptor    .. 41 

The   King's   Run 42 

Follow  My  Leader 42 

Bull  in  the  Ring  or  Sheep  Fold 42 

Leap  Frog  Games. 43 

Foot  and  a  Half 43 

Tag  Game   44 

Cross  Tag    44 

Squat  Tag    45 

^  King's   Land    45 

^  Sailors'   Tag    45 

Blind  Man's  Biff 45 

Hang  Tag 46 


RACING  GAMES. 

Club  Hustle  47 

Three  Indian  Club  Race 47 

Indian  Club  Circle   Pull 48 

Short  Dash 48 

Y.  M.  C.  A.  Potato  Race. 49 


Index  5 

PAGE 

Potato  Race  49 

Relay  Pursuit  Race 49 

Obstacle  Race 49 

Human  Race   49 

Wheelbarrow  Race 50 

Knapsack  Race   50 

Hopping  Race  50 

Chariot  Race   50 

Tug  of  War 50 

;:  PART    II. 

GAMES  FOR  A  FEW. 
BALL  GAMES. 

Scrimmage  Ball 52 

Basket  Ball    54    , 

Newcomb    54   I 

Hand  Polo  56 

Charley  Horse  Polo 60 

Bar   Bell    Polo '. 60 

Pin  Hockey   60 

Gas  Ball   61 

Hand  Ball    61 

Hand  Tennis  61 

Indoor   Base   Ball    62 

Ling  Ball    62 

Lang    Ball    63 

Square  Ball   63 

Indoor  Cricket    64 

Goal  Throwing  Game    65    , 

OTHER  GAMES  AND  ATHLETIC  FEATS. 

Baste  the  Bear 65 

Sling  the  Monkey 66 

Walk  Moon,  Walk 66 

Test  Mettle   .  67 


6  Index 

PAGE 

ATHLETIC  FJ:ATS. 

The  Palm  Spiring   67 

Trial  of  the  Thumb 68 

The    Finger    Feat 68 

Prostrate  and  Perpendicular 68 

Knuckle  Down   68 

The  Tantalus  Tricks   68 

The  Triumph    69 

Dot  and   Carry   Two 69 

Foot  Throw 69 

Breast  to  Mouth    69 

Jumping  Through  Fingers 70 

Catch   Penny   70 

The  Turn  Over  70 

The  Long  Reach   70 

Stooping   Stretch    71 

Out   Hopping  Game 71 

Foot  in  the  Ring 72 

Rooster    Fight    72 

Han<J  Wrestle  72 

Tug  of  War  for  Two 72 

Pole  Tug    . ' 73 

French  or  Indian  Wrestle 73 

Sitting  Toe  Wrestle 73 

Standing  Toe  Wrestle 73 

Dog   Fight    73 

Skin   the    Snake 74 

OAT  BAG  GAMES. 

Oat    Bags 74 

Mat  Tossing    75 

Circle  Piling   75 

Quick  Passing  in  Circle 75 

Competitive   Relay   Race 76 

Single  Line  Passing 76 

Double  Line   Passing 77 

Stake  Guard    .  .  78 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet 


Introduction 

The  accompanying  manual  of  gymnastic  games  was  worked 
out  by  Mr.  Chesley  while  a  student  of  mine  at  the  Y.  M.  C.  A. 
Training  School.  His  aim  was  to  make  a  compilation  of  games 
that  should  be  of  practical  use  under  the  conditions  of  the 
ordinary,  gymnasium.  To  this  end  he  made  a  careful  examina- 
tion of  the  literature  of  the  topic.  Between  four  and  five  hun- 
dred games  were  carefully  examined  with  reference  to  the  fol- 
lowing elements : 

First — Adaptability  in  point  of  interest,  muscular  exercise, 
and  the  like  to  the  different  ages  of  boys  and  young  men  or- 
dinarily frequenting  gymnasiums. 

Second — A  sufficient  degree  of  simplicity  so  that  the  games 
could  be  played  from  the  rules  without  the  necessity  of  personal 
instruction. 

Third — Emphasis  upon  those  games  which  admit  of  being 
played  by  a  large  number  of  persons  at  one  time. 

Fourth — The  games  have  been  selected  also  with  reference  to 
their  value  in  effecting  respiration,  circulation  and  nutrition  of 
the  body. 

The  specific  questions  which  have  been  asked  of  these  games 
are:  Are  they  interesting?  Do  they  involve  frequent  contrac- 
tions of  the  great  muscular  groups  of  the  body?  Do  they  demand 
moderate  or  excessive  efforts?  Is  the  effect  upon  the  heart  and 
circulation  good  or  bad?  Is  the  effect  upon  the  position  of 
the  chest  such  as  to  interfere  with  respiration?  Is  the  exercise 
intermittent,  so  as  to  allow  the  muscles  to  recover  their  tone, 
and  not  be  overcome  by  the  toxins  of  fatigue?  Is  there  danger 
of  competition  such  that  excessive  expenditure  of  energy  will 
be  involved,  or  that  emotions  will  be  unduly  excited?  Is  the 
muscular  action  so  localized  as  to  render  development  uneven? 


8  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Is  the  game  adapted  to  the  stage  of  life  of  the  individuals  under 
consideration? 

All  of  these  games  were  examined  not  only  with  reference  to 
these  principles,  but  they  were  then  carefully  tested  on  the 
gymnasium  floor  with  groups  of  boys  and  young  men.  It  is  not 
meant  that  each  game  was  worked  over  with  reference  to  these 
elements  and  the  best  work  selected. 

I  believe  the  collection  to  be  the  best  available.  I  also  believe 
that  the  classification  according  to  years  is  correct  and  practically 
useful.  While  the  book  is  distinctly  aimed  at  providing  games 
for  boys,  personal  experience  has  shown  that  a  large  number  of 
these  games  are  equally  adapted  to  women  and  girls. 

LUTHER  GULICK,  M.  D. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic   Games 


A    Manual     of    Gymnastic     Games     for    Male 
Adolescents 

It  is  the  intent  of  this  introduction  to  prove,  somewhat,  the 
value  of  play  and  of  games  of  the  right  kind,  at  the  right  time, 
in  the  young  man's  life. 

The  chief  reason  for  choosing  this  subject  for  a  thesis  is  the 
large  demand  for  suitable  games  for  gymnasium  use.  As  to  what 
comprises  suitable  games,  we  will  assume  the  following: 

"It  must  be  intrinsically  interesting.  The  men  must  like  to 
play  it  apart  from  the  good  that  they  get  out  of  it." 

(Athletic  League  Letters;  Games  VIII.,  p.  28,  Dr.  Gulick.) 

The  rules  should  be  simple  enough  not  to  detract  from  the 
interest  of  the  game.  The  majority  of  games  should  admit  a 
large  number  of  players.  This  is  one  of  the  most  difficult,  as 
well  as  one  of  the  most  important,  qualifications  to  fulfill.  Does 
the  game  "violate  any  of  the  fundamental  conditions  of  organic' 
life ;  or,  to  put  it  positively  and  more  fairly,  does  it  favor  the 
fundamental  conditions,  the  fundamental  necessities  of  respira- 
tion, circulation,  nutrition  and  nerve  action?  If  it  favors  these 
it  is  useful  from  the  physical  standpoint." 

(Athletic  League  Letters :  Sept.  25,  1899,  p.  7,  Dr.  Gulick.) 

As  to  the  real  value  of  games,  physiologically  and  psychologi- 
cally, and  hovr  much  they  may  be  used  with  real  benefit,  opinions 
of  leading  lights  in  the  physical  training  world  are   so   varied 
that  a  direct  statement  is  impossible.     All  believe  in  them  some 
what.    It  seems  to  be  a  matter  of  degree  which  much  be  decid' 
by  the  physical  director  in  his  own  peculiar  field  and  conditk 

At  the  First  National  Convention  of  the  A.  A.  A.  P.  E., 
4,   5  and  6,    1889,    Boston,   the    following   resolution   was 
discussed  and  voted : 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic   Games 

"Whereas,  we  believe  that  two  serious  obstacles  to  the  Ad- 
vancement of  Physical  Education  in  the  United  States  are : 

"(i).  The  disproportionate  promotion  of  athletic  sports, 
precluding  devotion  of  the  requisite  time  and  attention  to 
thorough  and  symmetrical  physical  development ;  and 

"(2).  The  too  .frequent  failure  of  school  and  college 
authorities  to  recognize  and  encourage  such  systematic  gym- 
nastic training;  therefore,  be  it 

"Resolved,  That  while  athletic  sports  are  highly  desirable,  the 
introduction  and  support  of  gymnastic  instruction  in  our  city 
and  country  schools  and  colleges  are  of  too  great  importance 
to  be  precluded  by  said  sports,  and  that  a  more  prominent  place 
in  the  curriculum  be  urged  for  systematic  gymnastic  training; 
and  be  it 

"Resolved,  That  to  this  end  the  Physical  Director  should  have 
control  of  both  gymnastics  and  athletics  in  schools  and  colleges." 
(American  Physical  Education  Review,  Vol.  IV.,  No.  2,  June, 
1899,  P-  196.) 

Of  course,  conditions  in  the  Young  Men's  Christian  Associa- 
tion are  even  more  complicated,  having  to  deal  with  students, 
clerks  and  mechanics  of  all  ages  and  temperaments,  in  one  class 
upon  the  floor,  and  the  physical  director,  for  numerous  reasons, 
without  the  power  to  dictate  in  all  circumstances. 

To  return  to  the  game  itself.     Dr.  Gulick  asks  the  following 
questions:   "Does  it   involve   frequent  contractions  of  the  great 
muscular  groups  of  the  body?    Does  it  demand  moderate  efforts? 
What  are  its  effects  upon  the  heart  and  lungs?     Does  the  game 
keep  the  position   of  the   chest   so  as   to   interfere  in   any   way 
with   the    function    of  circulation   and    respiration?     The   series 
if  contractions  should  be  intermittent,  so  as  to  allow  the  muscles 
•   recover   their  tone   and   not   be  overcome  by  the   results   of 
?ue.     Is  the  danger  of  competition  such  that  will  lead  men 
:cessive  expenditure?     Are  there  any  parts  of  the  body  that 
•    called    into  action    as   to    render  their   development   ex- 
Is  the  game  adapted  to  the  stage  of  life  of  the  individual 
it  is  designed?" 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  II 

(Athletic  League  Letters;  Games,  No.  VIII.,  p.  28,  Dr. 
Gulick.) 

We  proceed  to  quote  from  Dr.  Gulick's  article  upon  the 
"Psychological,  Pedagogical  and  Religious  Aspects  of  Group 
Games,"  as  published  in  the  Pedagogical  Seminary,  Vol.  VI.,' 
No.  2,  and  reprinted  in  the  Association  Outlook  for  February, 
1900: 

"The   studies  relate : 

"(a)  To  the  psychology  of  play,  particularly  the  plays  of 
Anglo-Saxon  adolescent  males. 

"(b)  To.  the  relation  of  these  play  instincts  to  the  serious 
business  of  life,  and  particularly  to  the  higher  social  and  psy- 
chical function  of  living. 

"(c)  To  the  ways  in  which  the  truly  religious  life  of  service 
to  humanity  may  be  best  initiated  and  fostered  in  the  boy. 

"(d)  To  the  directions  in  which  organizations  for  fostering 
the  religious  life  may  well  direct  their  activities.  *  *  *  We 
propose  to  examine  the  characteristics  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  young 
man  as  shown  by  his  spontaneous  plays,  particularly  his  nervo- 
muscular  plays. 

"The  chief  interests  and  activities  of  the  young  of  all  races 
and  of  the  higher  animals,  centre  about  play,  and  in  no  other 
direction  may  we  expect  to  find  dominant  characteristics  exhibit- 
ing themselves  with  the  power  and  clearness  we  may  in  this 
spontaneous  play  life." 

This  constitutes  our  second  reason  for  selecting  the  subject 
of  games  for  a  thesis. 

"  'Thus  it  may  be  that  we  can  get  important  light  in  regard 
to  the  dominant  characteristics  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  young  man 
by  making  careful  observation  of  his  plays.  *  *  *  We  shall 
observe  the  progressive  character  of  the  plays  through  the  life 
of  the  individual.  *  *  *  Attention  is  called  to  the  accompany- 
ing chart  entitled,  "Anglo-Saxon  Boys'  Plays."  By  this  title 
it  is  not  meant  that  these  plays  are  exclusively  carried  on  by 
Anglo-Saxon  boys,  for  they  are  inclusive  as  well  as  differ- 
entiating. The  chart  is  to  be  read  from  the  bottom  upward.  It 


IS  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

starts  at  zero,  birth,  and  terminates  at  adult  life.  Its  useful- 
ness must  depend  entirely  upon  the  general  characteristics  ex- 
hibited. Psychological  facts,  such  as  we  are  dealing  with, 
cannot  be  represented  in  a  graphic  way  so  as  to  be  complete 
in  details.  For  instance,  the  games  starting  at  the  years  seven 
and  twelve,  are  only  approximate.  In  some  individuals  these 
games  would  be  two  or  even  three  years  earlier,  and  in  others, 
correspondingly  later,  than  we  find  them  on  this  chart.  Then, 
again,  there  is  no  sharp  division  between  the  plays  in  the  three 
groups,  as  shown  by  these  two  lines;  they  shade  into  each  ol'ier. 
That  which  we  attempt  to  characterize  by  these  three  groups  are 
the  chief  interests  of  the  period.  I  have  attempted  to  arrange 
them  in  a  somewhat  psychological  order,  but  even  in  individuals 
this  varies  so  that  only  the  progression  from  simple  to  complex, 
as  a  whole,  can  be  accepted  as  expressing  the  thought.' 

"This  whole  article  of  Dr.  Gulick's  cannot  be  reproduced  here 
owing  to  lack  of  space,  but  should  be  carefully  dwelt  upon  by 
every  physical  director  in  the  country.  A  brief  epitome,  giving 
the  main  thought  as  directly  applying  to  our  subject,  is  the  best 
that  can  be  afforded. 

"He  divides  the  play  life  of  the  individual  into  three  periods 
(approximately,  as  stated  above).  The  first,  from  birth  to  seven, 
is  distinctively  the  period  when  the  individual  plays  alone.  To 
be  sure,  they  grow  more  complex  as  the  boy  grows  older,  but 
they  are  distinctively  individualistic.  To  quote  from  the  article: 

'  'This  large  group  of  plays,  it  will  be  observed  in  the  chart, 
are  arranged  in  a  column  growing  upward.  By  this  it  is  meant 
to  infer  that  these  activities,  these  plays,  having  once  entered 
into  the  life  of  the  individual,  remain  throughout  life  of  a  greater 
or  lesser  degree  of  interest,  and  that  further  interests  of  a  sim- 
ilar character  come  in.' 

"It  will  be  noted  that  I  have  inserted  a  few  tricks  of  a  solely 
individual  nature,  which  are  not  distinctively  applicable  to  the 
period  of  male  adolescence,  but  which  may  or  may  not  prove  in- 
teresting to  some  individuals  who  happen  to  be  alone  in  the 
gymnasium.  The  whole  subject  of  gymnastics  has  its  beginning 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  13 

in  this  period.  The  reason  for  this,  as  developed  by  Dr.  Gulick, 
is  most  interesting. 

"  'Recent  investigators  tell  us  that  during  the  first  one,  two  or 
three  years  of  life,  the  spinal  cord,  together  with  certain  lower 
parts  of  the  brain,  comes  irfto  its  most  complete  activity ;  that 
it  is  the  period  for  the  acquirement  of  all  those  activities  that 
depend  upon  the  spinal  cord.  These  we  will  know  are  the  reflex 
activities.  They  constitute  activities  dependent  upon  the  "lower 
level,"  so-called,  of  the  nervous  system,  according  to  the  Hugh- 
lings-Jackson  theory.  Thus,  this  period  of  development  is  the 
instinctive  and  the  reflex  period.  Habits  are  being  formed.  ''The 
best  development  of  the  later  life  is  related  to  the  best  develop- 
ment of  the  earlier  life." 

"  'The  second  period  of  play  life  is  from  seven  to  twelve.  Here 
the  activities  whose  centre  has  been  exclusively  one's  self  changes 
to  those  plays  whose  centre  of  interest  is  one's  self  in  relation  to 
others.  A  glance  through  the  list  as  outlined  in  this  period  will 
show  what  is  meant.  It  is  the  individual  competitive  age.  "The 
great  group  of  tag  plays — cross  tag,  wood  tag,  prisoner's  base, 
black  man,  and  the  like — exhibits  the  hunting  instinct.  The 
great  group  of  ball  games  of  which  the  most  common  are  One 
Old  Cat ;  Rounders ;  the  Marble  games ;  these  vary  in  details 
all  over  the  country." 

"  'The  whole  group  of  track  and  field  sports  acquire  interest 
at  this  period — racing  in  its  various  forms ;  throwing  in  competi- 
tion, jumping  and  pole-vaulting  in  competition,  etc.  This  period 
'  should  be  watched  as  developing  ethics,  morality,  justice — in  fact, 
I  the  higher  development  of  the  individuality. 

"  'Coming  now  to  our  third  major  division,  we  find  still 
more  highly  organized  plays  and  games.  These  begain  approx- 
imately at  twelve.  As  I  have  remarked  before,  they  may  begin 
earlier  or  may  be  postponed ;  in  some  individuals  they  doubtless 
never  begin.  Attention  is  called  to  the  characteristics  of  this 
group  of  games — base  ball,  basket  ball,  foot  ball,  cricket,  hockey, 
are  the  chief  games  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  young  man.' 

"Dr.  Gulick  goes  on  to  describe  this  period  as  one  of  gangs. 


14  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

predatory  activities,  hero-worship,  and,  most  of  all,  the  stage 
when  'team-u'ork  is  the  key-note.'  Not  that  all  play  team-work, 
but  that  is  the  ideal,  the  tendency  of  the  period.  It  is  the  stage 
of  co-ordination  and  self-sacrifice.  The  reason  is  obvious.  'Sav- 
ages who  have  reached  the  stage  o£  co-operation  under  a  chief, 
of  fighting  in  organized  groups,  are  doing  that  which  the  Anglo- 
Saxon'  boy  commences  to  do  soon  after  he  is  twelve.'  Thus,  he 
explains,  the  youth  rehearses  his  race  instincts,  and  arrives  at 
the  age  of  adolescence  to  the  period  of  highest  development  in 
his  ancestors,  that  of  self-sacrifice.  Here  his  altruistic  qualities 
begin  to  assert  themselves,  and  he  goes  on  to  those  higher 
developments  of  Christian  thought  and  activity,  reached  only  by 
the  highly  civilized  (Anglo-Saxon)  Christian  man  of  to-day. 

"The  author  goes  further  into  the  religious  aspect  of  the  sub- 
ject, which  we  again  recommend  to  the  attention  of  our  readers. 
The  subject-matter  seems  of  vital  importance  to  the  physical 
director  of  the  Young  Men's  Christian  Association. 

"Enough  has  been  said,  we  hope,  to  prove  somewhat  the  value 
of  games  of  the  right  kind,  at  the  right  time  in  the  young  man's 
life.  Thomas  Wentworth  Higginson,  while  apparently  knowing 
nothing  of  the  systematic  development  of  the  man,  as  outlined 
by  Dr.  Gulick,  must  have  had  a  presentiment  of  the  value  of  play 
life.  His  thoughts  are  so  delightfully  apt  and  in  line  with  the 
argument  that  we  wish  to  express  that  we  desire  to  quote  from 
his  'Outdoor  Papers' : 

"'Never  yet  did  an  ill-starred  young  saint  waste  his  Saturday 
afternoons  in  preaching  sermons  in  the  garret  to  his  deluded 
little  sisters  and  their  dolls  without  living  to  repent  it  in  ma- 
turity. The  precocious  little  sentimentalists  wither  away  like 
blanched  potato  plants  in  a  cellar ;  and  then  comes  some  vigorous 
youth  from  his  outdoor  work  or  play  and  grasps  the  rudder  of 
the  age,  as  he  grasped  the  oar,  the  bat  or  the  plough.' 

"Again,  wisely  said  Horace  Mann :  'All  through  the  life  of  a 
pure-minded  but  feeble-bodied  man.  his  path  is  lined  with 
memory's  gravestones,  which  mark  the  spots  where  noble  enter- 
prises perished  for  lack  of  physical  vigor  to  embody  them  in 
deeds.' 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  (lames  15 

"Again,  'We  must  not  ignore  the  play-impulse  in  human  nature, 
which,  according  to  Schiller,  is  the  foundation  of  all  art.  Meet 
Nature  on  the  cricket  ground  or  at  the  regatta ;  swim  with  her, 
ride  with  her,  run  with  her,  and  she  gladly  takes  you  back  once 
more  within  the  horizon  of  her  magic,  and  your  heart  of  man- 
hood is  born  again  into  more  than  the  fresh  happiness  of  the 
boy.' " 

("Play  in  Physical  Education,"  G.  E.  Johnston;  American 
Physical  Education  Review,  Vol.  III.,  no.  3,  p.  179.) 

The  belief  that  play  activity  has  its  root  in  instinct  is  by  no 
means  novel.  Professor  James,  in  his  chapter  on  instinct, 
catalogues  what  seem  to  him  to  be  the  most  prominent  of  the 
tendencies  which  are  instinctive  in  the  human  species,  and  in 
the  list  is  play.  In  1877  John  Strachan,  a  physician  of  Edin- 
burgh, issued  a  little  book  in  which  he  endeavors  to  show  that 
play  is  instinctive,  and  that  it  is  Nature's  method  of  prepara- 
tion for  mature  life,  claiming  that  play  activity,  alone,  is  suf- 
ficient for  the  highest  development  of  all  the  faculties,  mental  or 
physical.  Mr.  Johnson  also  claims  in  this  article  that  play  is  a 
preparation  for  future  serious  occupations,  and  cites  the  play 
of  kittens  or  young  dogs  as  an  example.  But  observation  seems 
to  teach  us  that  in  many  cases  the  play  activity  seems  to  be  a 
rehearsal  of  race  instinct,  as  in  the  hunting  and  fighting  games 
of  boys.  We  are  inclined  to  think  that  it  is  both. 

The  boy  who  is  building  a  hut  in  the  woods  and  the  girl 
who  is  making  a  dress  for  her  doll  are  working  with  all  their 
might,  but  are  nevertheless  at  play,  acting  from  "inner  neces- 
sity and  impulse,"  and  from  tendencies  which  are  clearly  in- 
stinctive. Moreover,  it  is  the  glory  of  play,  that  it  may  not  only 
prepare  for  future  serious  occupations,  but  does  actually  in  some 
happy  cases,  develop  into  a  life  work.  Art  belongs  to  play,  and 
he  who  paints  or  chisels  or  writes  because  he  must  is  only  fol- 
lowing out  a  play  impulse  into  and  through  maturity.  It  is  serious 
now,  and  for  that  reason,  and  for  dignity's  sake,  perhaps  should 
be  termed  work  rather  than  play. 

To  recapitulate.     Play  activity  is  rooted  in  instinct.    It  is  a  law 


16  Indoor  and  OtitJoor  Gymnastic  Games 

of  life,  obedience  to  which  prepares  for  the  serious  occupations 
of  maturity.  As  a  generator  and  conservator  of  nervous  energy 
it  surpasses  all  other  forms  of  exercise. '  As  a  character  builder 
it  produces  strength  and  positiveness  of  will.  It  is  especially 
needed  in  the  education  of  the  city  poor.  Play  should  follow 
deep-seated  and  well-defined  hereditary  tendencies  of  the  human 
species.  Not  only  in  games,  but  what  may  be  termed  in  dis- 
tinction, play  should  be  utilized. 


ANGLO-SAXON  BOYS'  PLAYS  (Ncrvo-Muscular) 

BY  A.  M.  CHESLEV 


CO-OPERATIVE 


INDIVIDUALISTIC 


COMPETITIVE 


INDIVIDUALISTIC 


Social  Organizer 
Good  Government 
Love  of  Country 
Hero  Service    Religion 
Cricket        Polo 
Battle  Ball 

i  Basket  Ball 
1  Foot  Ball 
Volley  Ball 
j  Tug  of  War     Bound  Ball 

Club  Hustle 
Day  and  Night 
Predatory  Gangs 
Front  Duty    Siege   War  1 


Teams  • 


Wealth 
Politics 
Business 
Tennis 
Golf 

Hand  Ball 

Hand  Tennis 

Track  and  Field  Sports 

Indian  Club  Race 

Stunts 


Hermit 
Philosopher 

Student 
Gymnastics 


Base  Ball  Gangs 


Foot  in  the  Ring 

Link  Chase 

|  Indian  Club  Circle  Pull  | 

Fox  and  Geese 

Battering  Ram 

B  11  in  the  Ring 

Black  Man      Hare 

Sailor's  Tag 
Pare  Base    Leap  Frog  I 

Three  Deep 

Puss  in  the  Corner 

B  11  Tossing  Games 

King's  Land  Spud 

Prisoner's  Base 

Blind  Man's  Buff 

|  All  Run    Squat  Tag  | 

Cross  Tag 

Mat  Tag 


Skin  the  Snake 

Palm  Spring 
Finger  Feat,  etc. 

Swimming 

Athletic  Feats 

Machinery 

Tools  of  increasing 
Complexity 

Rowing 


Tag 


Hide  and  Seek 


"  Coop  " 


Sailing 
Knife  Work 
Shooting 
Swinging 
Folding 
Cutting 
Throwing 
Running 
Piling,  etc. 

Digging 
Sand  Plays 

Blocks 
IDroppingThings 
1     Whole  Arni 
and  Body 
Movements 
Kicking 


iBi 


IS  Indoor  and  Outdoor  (tymnastic  (tames 


.Note 

These  games  are  especially  adapted  to  the  Adolescent 
Period,  but  in  many  instances  are  played  throughout 
the  country  by  classes  of  all  ages.  Most  of  them  have 
been  tried,  personally,  by  the  writer,  with  success.  A 
few,  coming  with  splendid  recommendation  and  seem- 
ing obviously  adapted  to  the  need,  have  not  been 
tested. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  Ig 


PART    I. 


SIMPLE  GAMES  FOR  A  LARGE  NUMBER 
Ball  Tossing  Game . 

Form  a  circle  facing  centre,  double  arms'  length  distance  be- 
tween players.  One  player  in  centre.  Players  toss  a  ball  to  each 
other,  left  or  right,  or  over  the  head  of  one  player  only,  to  player 
beyond,  the  centre  player  endeavoring  to  get  the  ball  or  knock 
it  to  the  floor,  and  in  case  of  miss  exchanging  places  with  the 
player  who  caused  the  failure,  either  by  poor  throwing  or  catch- 
ing. 

Ball  Tossing  Games 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  II.,  No.  19,  p.  136.) 

Form  a  circle  in  front  in  close  order,  wide  enough  to  permit 
the  passage  or  escape  of  the  centre  player.  Pupils  face  the  centre. 
The  centre  player  tosses  the  ball  to  whomsoever  he  likes,  such 
player  in  turn  tossing  the  ball  back  to  the  centre  player  who 
must  catch  it  and  escape  with  it  through  one  of  the  openings, 
the  player  who  threw  the  ball  endeavoring  to  catch  him  before 
he  can  succeed.  Places  are  exchanged  when  the  centre  player 
has  been  caught. 

The  centre  player  of  a  circle  tosses  the  ball  to  his  playmates  a 
number  of  times  agreed  upon — four,  six  or  eight  times.  Upon  the 
last  return  toss  the  players  scatter,  the  centre  player  endeavoring 
to  hit  some  one  with  the  ball  before  the  players  can  get  too  far 
away  from  him.  The  player  who  is  hit  exchanges  places  with 
the  centre  player. 


20  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Ball  Passing  Games  and  Diversions 

For  Basket  Ball ;  also  to  be  played  with  Oat  Bags. 
(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  IV.,  No.  42,  p.  141.) 

1.  The  players  are  divided  into  two  parties.     Each  party  then 
arranges  itself  into  two  ranks  facing  each  other.     The  ranks  are 
from  two  to  five  paces  apart,  as  space  will  permit,  and  the  two 
parties  are  two  or  three  paces  apart.     The  ranks  in  each  party 
are  numbered  I  and  2.     All  being  ready,  a  ball  is  given  to  the 

First  Rank    OOOOOOOOOOO 

H  £"&  b-    i 

^^  *\  First  party. 

.Second  Rank    OOOOOOOOOOO 

First  Rank     OOOOOOOOOOO 

^^^  Second  party. 

Second  Rank    OOOOOOOOOOO 

first  member  of  Rank  i  in  each  party.  He  throws  to  the  mem- 
ber of  Rank  2  just  opposite  him,  who  throws  it  to  the  second 
member  of  Rank  I,  and  so  on.  When  the  ball  gets  to  the  last 
member  by  the  same  zig-zag  path,  the  party  which  returns  the 
ball  to  the  first  member  first,  wins  the  game.  (See  figure.) 

2.  The  players  are  arranged  in  four  ranks,  numbered   i,  2,  3 
and  4.     (See  figure.)     Ranks  i  and  2  face  ranks  3  and  4.     Ranks 
i  and  3  constitute  one  party  and  2  and  4  the  other.     Hence  the1 
ball  must  be  thrown  over  one  rank  each  time.     Otherwise  the 
game  is  like  No.  I. 

First  Rank  O  OOOOOOO 

P  6 

Second  Rank          O  OOOOOOO 

Third  Rank  O      *    O          O  O          O          OO          O 

h 

Fourth  Rank          OfflO          O  O          O          O          O          O 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  21 

3.  The  players  form  a  circle  facing  inward.  Each  half  of  the 
circle  constitutes  a  party,  as  shown  in  the  cut.  Otherwise  the 
game  is  the  same  as  before. 


o^          ; 

j 

^ 

0 

X 
0 

—  — 

0 

0 

o 

4.  The  two  parties  form  separate  circles,  the  one  within  the 
other.  The  inner  party  faces  outward,  the  other  party  faces  in- 
ward. Two  balls  are  used  by  each  party. 


o 

o 

0          0 

0 

°     o 

°o 

°  .    1 

o  o 

o  o 

o 

°V 

0      o    o 

o 
o 

0         0 

5.  The  parties  form  separate  circles  and  the  ball  must  pass 
around  the  circle  three  times.  The  party  which  first  accom- 
plishes this  wins. 


22  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Mount   Ball 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  6,   1894.) 

This  ancient  game  is  played  under  difficult  but  very  amusing 
conditions.  The  players  "pair  off"  according  to  height,  strengtli 
and  agility,  and  form  a  double  circle,  faces  to  the  centre,  with 
from  two  to  six  paces  interval  between  pairs,  according  to  the 
number-  of  players  taking  part.  A  coin  or  other  article  tossed 
in  the  air  decides  who  of  the  pairs  shall  become  "pack-mule"  or 
"pony"  and  who  "rider."  Those  designated  as  riders  take  a  stride 
position  sideward  and  brace  themselves  by  placing  both  hands 
on  the  knees,  which  should  be  kept  extended,  the  body  being 
forward  in  order  that  the  riders  in  the  rear,  outer  circle,  may 
readily  mount  by  straddling  their  shoulders,  upon  the  command 
of  the  leader  of  the  game  to  "Mount."  The  riders  having 
mounted,  play  "catch  ball,"  the  ponies  (as  the  play  becomes 
better  understood)  growing  restive,  turning  right,  left  or  about, 
in  order  to  make  the  ball  catching  as  difficult  as  possible.  When 
the  ball  has  been  missed  by  a  rider,  all  immediately  dismount 
and  flee,  the  pony  of  the  rider  who  missed  the  ball  quickly  picking 
it  up  and  commanding  all  to  "stand"  or  "halt."  All  riders  obey 
by  standing  still  and  the  pony  endeavors  to  hit  a  rider  who 
may  jump  upward,  or  drop,  but  not  otherwise  leave  his  place. 
The  other  ponies  remain  in  position  in  order  that  the  riders 
may  be  readily  distinguished.  If  the  player  who  aims  to  hit  a 
rider  is  successful  in  properly  hitting  him,  places  are  exchanged, 
riders  becoming  ponies  and  ponies  riders.  If  not  successful,  the 
game  is  continued  as  at  first.  The  ball  must  at  no  time  be  held 
by  a  player  but  tossed  as  quickly  as  caught,  no  matter  in  what 
position  the  rider  may  find  himself.  The  play  may  also  be  so  di- 
rected that  any  pony  can  pick  up  the  ball  and  aim  it  at  the  nearest 
rider.  The  leader  of  the  game  gives  the  command  to  mount  and 
dismount,  determining  the  "misses"  and  "hits." 

Bound    Ball 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  i,  No.  10,  p.  16.) 
The  players  divide  into  two  equal  parties  and  take  their  places 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic   Game*  23 

on  both  sides  of  a  •  line  marked  on  the  floor,  at  a  distance  of 
about  five  paces  from  it.  The  players  on  each  side  group  them- 
selves so  that  each  man  will  have  a  space  of  from  four  to  six  feet 
square  to  move  about  in.  The  leader  of  the  game  throws  the  ball 
into  the  midst  of  the  players  of  either  group  in  such  a  way  that  it 
will  rebound,  the  play  consisting  in  keeping  the  ball  by  striking  it 
with  the  hand  from  above,  downward,  and  upon  the  first  opportu- 
nity directing  it  into  the  opposite  group  on  the  other  side  of  the 
line.  This  group  retaliates  in  the  same  manner,  landing  the  ball 
in  the  first  group,  and  so  on.  The  score  keeper  notes  the  follow- 
ing errors,  twelve  of  which  lose  the  game:  Failure  to  strike 
the  ball  from  above ;  failure  to  bound  the  ball,  before  landing  it 
in  the  opposite  field ;  "deadening,"  i.  e.,  permitting  the  ball  to  roll 
instead  of  bounding  it.  In  case  the  ball  does  not  rebound  in  the 
opposite  field,  the  group  from  which  it  came  has  another  trial. 

Curtain   Ball 

(Mind  and  Body,  VoL  IV.,  No.  38,  p.  34.) 

Similar  to  Volley  Ball.  Half  of  the  players  stationed  on  one 
side  of  a  curtain  about  eight  feet  high  and  half  on  the  other, 
thus  hiding  the  players  from  each  other's  view.  Rest  of  the  game 
same  as  Volley  Ball.  Two  umpires  necessary. 

Bombardment 

Similar  to  Battle  Ball.  More  can  play.  Have  as  many  pins  or 
Indian  clubs  set  up  as  men  playing.  Players  all  stand  in  front  of 
pins  at  either  end  of  gymnasium  and  keep  as  many  balls  busy  as 
you  have  on  hand.  Every  pin  knocked  down  counts  one  point  for 
the  side  knocking1  it  down.  Balls  may  be  thrown  against  the  wall 
behind  the  pins  and  carromed  back,  knocking  down  pins  in  that 
way.  Men  must  not  step  over  the  centre  line  in  throwing  the 
ball  or  for  any  reason.  With  the  use  of  the  medicine  balls  and 
two  or  three  basket  balls,  twenty  players  can  be  kept  exceedingly 
busy. 


24  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games    . 

Mat  Tag 

(Era— 1893— Page    872.) 

Place  mats  on  the  floor  some  distance  apart.  One  man  takes 
his  place  in  centre  of  the  floor  with  the  ball  and  tries  to  hit  one 
of  the  other  players  while  they  cross  from  one  mat  to  another, 
the  mats  being  places  of  safety.  When  he  hits  another  player, 
the  player  hit  takes  his  place. 

All  Run 

In  "All  Run"  a  square  is  made  in  the  centre  of  the  floor  in 
which  all  of  the  players  gather,  one  man  being  chosen  or  volun- 
teering to  take  first  throw.  The  ball  is  then  thrown  in  the  air 
and  everyone  runs  to  get  as  far  away  from  the  centre  as  pos- 
sible except  the  thrower,  who  must  catch  the  ball  and  then 
cry  "Hold,"  at  which  all  the  rest  instantly  stop.  He  then  chooses 
a  man  at  whom  to  throw  the  ball,  he  being  obliged  to  stand  on 
the  spot  where  he  caught  the  ball.  If  he  hits  the  man  at  whom 
he  is  throwing,  that  player  takes  his  place ;  if  he  misses  him,  the 
players  all  return  to  the  centre  and  he  is  given  another  trial.  If 
he  misses  the  second  time,  he  is  obliged  to  stand  twenty  feet 
from  the  square,  with  his  back  to  the  players  and  each  player 
has  one  chance  to  hit  him  with  the  ball. 

Spud 

"Spud"  is  played  ordinarily  with  an  old  indoor  base  ball  some- 
what soft  from  use.  A  basket  ball  or  volley  ball  may  be  used. 
All  gather  around  one  of  the  players  who  drops  the  ball,  at  the 
same  time  giving  one  of  the  names  or  numbers.  The  person 
called  immediately  obtains  possession  of  the ,  ball  and  throws 
from  where  he  stands  at  one  of  the  players  (who  scatter).  If  he 
hits  a  player  that  man  strives  to  hit  another  and  so  on  until  some- 
one misses  hitting.  One  miss  counts  one  spud.  The  person  who 
misses  continues  the  game  in  the  centre.  Three  misses  or  spuds 
make  the  guilty  party  liable  to  punishment  in  "All  Run." 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  25 

Babylonian 

(Era— 1893— P.  3"-) 

Played  with  the  big  medicine  ball.  Team  composed  of  eight  or 
twelve  men  each;  eight  seems  to  be  the  better  number.  The 
teams  are  placed  in  line  sideward,  facing  each  other.  The  men 
clasp  one  another  around  the  waist  and  in  no  case  must  the  hold 
be  broken.  At  the  word  "Go,"  each  team  rushes  toward  the 
centre,  using  the  feet  only  in  working  the  ball  toward  the  centre, 
each  team  endeavoring  to  get  the  ball  across  the  opposite  goal. 
Should  a  hold  be  broken  or  the  men  fall  down,  the  whistle  is 
blown,  lines  formed  over  again  and  the  team  breaking  or  foul- 
ing loses  a  point,  three  fouls  making  a -goal.  Best  two  in -three 
or  three  in  five  goals  constitute  the  game.  The  ends  are  the 
men  who  must  do  the  best  work,  preventing  the  ball  from  going 
out  at  the  sides,  also  keeping  the  lines  closed  up.  If  the  ball 
goes  out  of  bounds,  it  must  be  placed  in  the  centre  again ;  then 
the  game  continues.  Tripping,  breaking  hold  or  unnecessarily  . 
rough  play  constitute  fouls,  at  the  discretion  of  the  referee. 

Roll  Ball 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  V.,  No.  55;  Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  IV.,  No. 

39;  Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  II.,  No.  24.) 
Players  form  in  a  circle  with  hands  grasped.  A  starter  stands 
in  the  centre  and  tries  to  kick  the  ball  so  that  it  will  roll  but  not 
leave  the  ground,  and  pass  through  between  two  members  of  the 
circle.  These  roll  it  back.  This  continues  until  the  ball  goes 
through,  when  the  player  on  whose  right  side  it  passed,  exchanges 
places  with  the  centre  player. 

Medicine  Ball  Passing 

(Physical   Education,   Vol.   IV,   page  90.) 

Great  sport  can  be  attained  by  adding  several  articles;  for  in- 
stance, basket  ball,  base  ball,  tennis  ball,  Indian  club,  dumb  bell, 
etc.,  if  the  class  is  large.  This  combination  keeps  one  in  a  state 


»6  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

of  excitement,  and  perhaps  in  some  instances  too  much,  but  still 
is  a  very  practical  game  for  the  gymnasium.  A  penalty  may  be 
attached  to  the  person  dropping  or  failing  to  pass  accurately.  It 
may  be  to  withdraw  from  the  circle  after  making  two  or  more 
such  errors. 

Corner  Ball 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  V.,  No.  56,  p.  186.) 

A  space  about  thirty  feet  long  and  twenty  feet  wide  is  needed 
for  the  game.  (See  figure.)  A  line  (i)  divides  this  into  two 
equal  parts.  At  each  corner  is  a  base.  Each  party  forms  in  a 
straight  line  about  eight  feet  from  the  line.  Two  members  of 
each  party  take  positions  in  the  bases  on  the  other  side.  Number 


• 

(*                     0 

0) 

(• 

0) 

(• 

0) 

(• 

0) 

(• 

0) 

•                o) 

(•                ° 

one  of  the  first  party  then  throws  the  ball  over  the  heads  of 
the  second  party,  to  one  of  his  fellows  on  either  of  the  bases.  If 
he  catches  it,  he  throws  it  back.  The  opposing  party  tries  to 
intercept  the  ball  and,  if  successful,  gains  one  point.  The  play 
then  continues,  the  other  side  throwing  the  ball. 
The  rules  of  the  game  are : 

1.  The  members  of  each  party  may  move  about  freely  in  their 
space. 

2.  No  member  may  cross  the  line. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet  Vj 

Captain  or  Centre  Ball 

(American   Physical  Education  Review.) 

March,  '99,  p.  73. 

The  field  is  divided  into  two  equal  parts  with  a  neutral  space 
of  about  two  feet  intervening,  each  half  again  being  subdivided 
into  five  squares  or  bases  (i,  2,  3,  4,  5)  and  a  centre-base  (6)  as 
per  diagram. 


oG 


o 
o 
oJ 


•  o 


Place  a  spring-board  in  the  centre  square.  The  line  up  of 
the  players  is  the  following:  A  takes  centre,  B  first,  C  second, 
D  third,  E  fourth,  and  F  fifth  bases,  while  guards  G,  H,  I  and  J 
line  up  in  the  opposing  players'  territory.  The  opposing  players 
or  team  take  the  same  position  on  the  other  side  of  the  field.  Play 
begins  with  the  umpire  taking  his  place  in  the  neutral  place  and 
tossing  up  the  ball.  The  players  of  both  sides  try  to  gain  posses- 
sion. If,  for  instance,  guard  H  succeeds,  he  throws  the  ball  to 
one  of  the  basemen  of  his  side,  say  B,  who  in  turn  will  throw  the 
ball  to  centre  A,  while  the  guards  of  the  opposing  team  do  their 


18  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

best  to  prevent  a  throw  to  centre,  by  holding  up  their  hands, 
catching  the  ball  and  throwing  same  to  their  own  side.         , 

1.  If  a  baseman  is  successful  in  throwing  the  ball  to  centre,  it 
counts  one  point  for  his  side.     Then  the  ball  is  returned  to  the 
umpire  who  begins  play  again  by  tossing  it  up. 

2.  If  the  centre  player,  in  trying  to  catch  the  ball,  steps  off  the 
board,  it  does  not  count  one  point,  but  he  has  the  privilege  of  re- 
turning the  ball  to  one  of  his  basemen  without  interference  of  the 
opposing  guards. 

3.  If  a  throw  from  a  baseman  to  centre  is  blocked  by  the  op- 
posing guards,  he  should  pass  the  ball  on  to  the  next  baseman  or 
to  the  guards  of  his  side,  who  pass  the  ball  on  to  the  next  base- 
man, etc.,  keeping  the  ball  moving  as  much  as  possible. 

4.  A  throw  from  a  guard  to  centre  does  not  count  one  point, 
but  centre  can  pass  the  ball  to  one  of  his  basemen    (opposing 
players  being  allowed  to  interfere). 

5.  Guards  are  not  allowed  to  cross  the  boundary  line  or  to 
step  within  the  squares,  nor  are  the  basemen  allowed  to  leave 
their  bases.     Leaving  the  bases  or  crossing  the  boundary   line 
to  interfere  with  a  play  or  gain  possession  of  the  ball  is  to  be 
punished  by  giving  the  ball  to  the  opposing  side,  or  awarding 
them  a  point. 

6.  Kicking  or  striking  the  ball  out  of  a  player's  hands  may  be 
allowed,  but  if  all  rough  playing  is  to  be  avoided  it  should  not 
be  permitted. 

7.  If  the  captain  or  player  of  a  team   is   about  lo  protest  a 
decision  of  the  umpire,  he  must  raise  his  hand,  and  then  the 
umpire  will  call  time,  but  if  he  leaves  his  place  before  time  is 
called,  the  umpire  %  will  give  one  point  to  the  opposing  team. 

8.  If  the  centre  tis  so  thoroughly  blocked  that  the  ball  cannot 
reach  him,  a  point  may  be  scored  by  passing  the  ball  from  base 
to  base  to  their  respective  order  in  an  uninterrupted  circle. 

Two  fifteen-minute  hales  may  be  played. 

The  usual  number  of  players  is  twenty,  ten  in  each  team ;  but 
we  have  played  with  as  many  as  thirty  or  forty.  If  forty,  num- 
ber of  bases  and  guards  may  be  doubled. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  29 

Dodge  Ball 
(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  IV.,  No.  38,  p.  34.) 

Of  any  even  number  of  players,  half  form  a  circle,  while 
the  other  half  stands  inside  the  ring,  facing  outward.  Those 
in  the  centre  dodge  the  ball,  which,  while  in  play,  is 
thrown  by  any  of  those  forming  the  circle,  with  the  inten- 
tion of  striking  the  centre  ones  out.  Those  put  out  take  their 
places  among  those  of  the  circle,  and  have  an  equal  chance  at 
those  remaining  in  the  centre.  Only  one  is  put  out  at  a  time. 
This  is  kept  up  until  only  one  is  left,  who  is  titled  King,  after 
which  the  players  exchange  places,  i.  e.,  those  who  were  in  the 
centre  now  form  the  circle. 

Note. — If  the  touch  is  preceded  by  a  bound  of  the  ball  it  does 
not  count. 

*Peg  Driving,  or  Another  Centre  Ball 

(German-American  Gymnastics,  Stecher,  p.  301.) 
This  game  may  be  played  indoors  as  well  as  outdoors,  as 
many  as  ten  to  fifty  participating.  There  must  be  a  sufficiently 
large  and  even  surface  on  which  to  form  a  circle,  with  room 
enough  between  the  players  for  them  to  move  about  freely.  Each 
player  must  have  a  stick  or  wand  about  three  feet  long.  A  basket 
ball  is  used.  If  played  outdoors,  each  player  except  one  makes 
a  hole  about  four  inches  in  diameter  in  front  of  the  place  he 
occupies  in  the  circle  in  which  to  place  one  end  of  his  stick.  If 
played  indoors,  a  chalk  ring  may  be  made  to  indicate  a  hole.  A 
hole  or  chalk  ring  large  enough  to  hold  the  ball  must  be  made 
in  the  centre  of  the  circle. 

In  beginning  the  game  all  players  place  one  end  of  their  stick 
into  the  centre  hole  under  and  around  the  ball.  Upon  count- 
ing one,  two,  three,  all  uplift  the  ball  with  their  sticks  and 
rush  for  a  ring  or  hole  in  which  to  place  one  end  of  their  stick. 


*The  articles  in  this  book  taken  from  "  Gymnastics  :  a  Text  Book  of  German 
American  Gymnastics,"  by  William  A.  Stecher,  and  published  under  the  auspices 
of  the_  North  American  Gymnastic  Union  (Lee  &  Shepard,  Boston,  price  $3.00),  are 
copyrighted  and  used  by  permission. 


3O  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

when  all  holes  are  taken,  one  player  will  be  left  as  "centre  player ' 
or  "it."  He  must  now  roll  and  push  the  ball  from  where  it  may 
have  fallen,  into  the  centre  hole,  with  his  stick,  at  the  same  time 
guarding  against  the  other  players  who  strive  to  direct  the  ball 
from  its  course,  it  being  the  duty  of  all  players  to  prevent  him 
from  getting  it  into  the  centre  ring  or  hole.  Attacks  on  the  ball 
are  best  guarded  against  by  placing  the  stick  in  front  of  the  ball 
so  as  to  ward  off  the  thrusts  in  its  direction.  Any  player  may 
leave  his  place  to  attack  the  ball,  but  as  soon  as  the  centre  player 
spies  a  vacant  hole  he  may  abandon  the  ball  and  aim  to  place 
his  stick  in  the  vacant  hole.  The  players  who  may  have  left 
their  places  will  then  scramble  for  holes  (or  rings),  and  one  of 
their  number  will  always  be  left  as  centre  player.  Such  centre 
player  then  attempts  to  get  the  ball  into  the  centre  ring  or 
hole.  If  successful,  the  game  is  begun  over  again.  During  the 
game  any  unoccupied  ring  or  hole  may,  at  any  time,  be  taken 
by  any  player,  and  the  more  this  is  done  the  livelier  and  more 
interesting  the  game  will  be. 

Ball  Hustle 

Conducted  in  the  same  manner  as  Club  Hustle,  page  47,  except- 
ing that  a  basket  ball  is  used  instead  of  an  Indian  club. 

Man  Overboard 

(W.  H.  Kinnicutt,  M.D.,  Physical  Director  Cleveland  Y.M.C.A.) 
A  rollicking  hygienic  game.  Any  number  of  players  sit  in  a 
ring  and  throw  a  heavy  medicine  ball  in  any  direction.  The 
object  is  to  throw  with  such  force  that  the  catcher  is  overbalanced 
and  rolled  backward  to  the  floor.  The  legs  must  be  kept  before 
the  body  and  not  interlocked  with  another's. 

Knee  Ball 

(W.  H.  Kinnicutt,  M.D., Physical  Director  Cleveland  Y.M.C.A.) 

An  hygienic  game  simply.     A   large  medicine  ball   is  placed 

in  a  ring  of  players,  who  have  their  arms  around  each  other's 

waists,  the  ball  being  lifted  with  the   feet  to  position,  is  kept 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic   Games  31 

from  falling  to  the  floor  by  the  players  bumping  it  with  their 
knees.     About  ten  players  make  the  best  game. 

Kick  Ball 

Any  number  of  players  sit  in  a  ring  with  hands  braced  behind 
hips;  a  medicine  ball — preferably  14-inch — is  kicked  or  pushed 
with  the  foot  or  feet  in  any  direction.  An  hygienic  game  only. 

TAG   GAMES 
Skip  Away 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  II.,  No.  24,  p.  242.) 
A  circle  is  formed  and  hands  are  grasped.  One  of  the  players, 
running  on  the  outside,  taps  another  who  immediately  starts 
to  run  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  place  he  left  remaining 
vacant  until  one  or  the  other  shall  have  returned  to  it  first.  The 
unsuccessful  player  continues  the  Tunning,  etc.  The  players, 
upon  meeting,  may  exchange  greetings,  bow  to  each  other,  or 
perform  some  other  courtesy  or  exercise  before  completing  the 
circuit.  This  play,  if  the  number  of  players  is  sufficiently  large, 
may  also  be  played  in  a  double  circle,  an  inner  and  outer  ring, 
the  players  facing  each  other  and  grasping  their  uplifted  hands, 
thus  forming  an  arch  under  which  the  two  running  players  must 
wind  their  way. 

Whip  Tag 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  II.,  No.  20,  p.  158.) 

For  any  number.  Form  a  circle,  all  facing  the  centre  and 
holding  their  hands  behind  their  backs.  One  running  around 
the  circle  will  drop  the  "beetle"  (a  sack  similar  to  a  policeman's 
club,  stuffed  with  cotton  batting,  or  a  towel  with  a  knot  in  the 
end  will  do)  into  the  hand  of  another.  The  person  receiving 
the  "beetle"  quickly  turns  upon  his  right-hand  neighbor,  and 
with  a  series  of  blows  chases  him  around  the  circle  and  back 
to  his  place.  If  the  neighbor  can  run  faster  than  the  holder  of 
the  "beetle"  he  will,  of  course,  escape  the  blows.  The  holder 
of  the  "beetle"  now  takes  the  place  of  the  last  leader. 


33  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Three  Deep 
(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  i,  p.  13.) 

Twenty-four  or  more  players  form  a  circle  of  pairs  with 
space  enough  between  the  players  (who  stand  closely  one  behind 
the  other,  facing  the  centre  of  the  circle)  to  allow  the  runners 
to  turn  and  run  in  all  directions.  Two  players  on  the  outside 
of  the  circle  and  at  a  distance  from  each  other  begin  the  game. 
One  of  them,  the  "tagger,"  seeks  to  tag  the  other  player  before 
he  can  secure  a  place  in  front  of  any  of  the  pairs  forming 
the  circle.  If  he  succeeds  in  this  roles  are  changed,  the  player 
tagged  becoming  "tagger"  and  the  former  "tagger"  in  return  en- 
deavors to  secure  a  place  in  front  of  some  pair.  But  whenever 
the  runner  (the  player  pursued)  has  succeeded  in  getting  in 
front  of  a  pair  before  being  tagged,  then  the  hindmost  (the  last 
or  third,  in  the  respective  rank)  must  take  to  his  heels  and  seek 
to  evade  the  unsuccessful  "tagger,"  who  now  turns  his  attention 
to  him.  In  seeking  to  evade  a  tagger  the  successive  players 
may  run  in  any  direction,  either  left  or  right  through  and  across 
the  circle,  but  not  pass,  in  front  of  any  one  rank  to  another 
rank  in  such  a  manner  as  to  induce  wrong  starts.  A  hindmost 
player  may  also  form  in  front  of  his  own  rank,  making  the 
second  player  in  such  rank  hindmost  or  "third."  The  play  is 
always  directed  against  the  third  or  last  of  a  rank,  two  players 
being  the  number  limited  to  each  place. 

(When  classes  of  players  in  the  beginning  are  too  large  the 
circle  may  be  formed  by  rows  or  ranks  of  threes,  instead  of  twos 
or  pairs.) 

Expert  players  can  form  several  circles  and  run  from  circle 
to  circle,  two  pairs  playing  simultaneously.  The  above  play  can 
be  varied  in  a  number  of  ways,  as  follows : 

(a)  The  players  may  reverse  the  order  of  forming  for  the 
play,  facing  outward  from  centre  instead  of  toward  the  centre. 
The  pursued  player  in  this  case  forms  in  the  rear  instead  of  in 
the  front,  and  the  first  takes  the  part  of  the  third  or  hindmost 
player. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic   Games  33 

(&)  The  last  form  may  also  be  played  in  such  a  manner  that 
all  the  front  or  outside  ones  grasp  hands  sideward,  while  all  the 
second  ones  place  their  hands  on  the  shoulders  of  the  front 
players.  In  this  form  of  the  play  the  second  player  must  push 
the  front  player  away  from  his  place  at  the  proper  time  (when 
a  third  player  enters  the  circle  and  places  hands  on  his  shoulders). 
The  entry  into  the  circle  must  not  be  hindered. 

(c)  The  circle  of  pairs  may  be  formed  so  that  the  players  face 
each  other  with  uplifted  arms,  hands  grasped  to  form  an  arch. 
The  pursued  player  may  take  his  place  between  any  two  players, 
the  one  on  whom  his  back  is  turned  becoming  third  or  pursued 
player. 

(rf)  The  last  form  can  also  be  played  with  the  class  in  other 
formation  than  that  of  a  circle ;  the  pairs  may  also  scatter  over 
the  playground  and  play  without  the  holding  of  hands  or  uplifted 
arms. 

(e)  Another  form  is  to  form  two  ranks,  one  on  each  of  oppo- 
site goals,  about  twenty  paces  apart.  A  player  steps  out  toward 
a  goal  and  taps  or  hits  any  of  the  outstretched  hands.  The 
player  tagged  becomes  pursuer,  and  must  try  to  catch  the  tagger 
before  he  can  reach  his  own  goal.  If  successful,  the  player 
caught  must  go  to  the  tagger's  goal  and  the  tagger  turns  his 
attention  to  nis  victim's  goal. 

(/)  In  the  first  description  of  the  game  various  exercises 
may  be  introduced,  as  vaulting  over  each  other  or  slipping  to 
place  between  the  legs  of  those  in  front,  all  players  standing 
in  stride  position  sideward.  In  a  spirited  game  it  is  not  neces- 
sary for  the  mnner  to  stand  in  front  of  a  pair,  he  simply  touch- 
ing base,  the  place  in  fr.ont  of  a  pair,  with  a  hand  or  foot, 
sufficing. 

*  Prisoner's  Base 

(Champlin's  Cyclopedia  of  Games  and  Sports.) 

Played  by  any  number  of  persons,  though  the  best  number 
is  from  twelve  to  sixteen.  Two  "Bosses"  or  enclosures,  are 


*Used  ty  permission  from  the  publishers,  Henry  Holt  &  Co.,  New  York. 


34 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 


marked  off,  each  large  enough  to  hold  half  the  players,  and  two 
"Prisons,"  a  little  smaller,  some  distance  from  the  Bases,  accord- 
ing to  convenience.  Two  methods  of  laying  out  ground  are 
shown  in  the  diagrams. 


Prioorv 


[AjJ 
Priaorv 


A* 


The  players  are  divided  into  two  opposing  sides,  each  of  which 
occupies  one  of  the  Bases.  A  player  from  one  side  begins  the 
game  by  running  beyond  the  bounds  of  his  Base  and  one  on 
the  opposite  side  pursues  him.  A  second  man  from  the  first 
party  chases  the  pursuer,  and  so  on,  each  party  sending  out  as 
many  men  as  they  choose.  If  any  one  is  touched,  while  Out  of 
bounds,  by  a  player  on  the  opposite  side  who  left  bounds  after 
him  he  must  go  to  the  prison  belonging  to  the  enemy,  and  stay 
there  until  he  is  released  by  one  of  his  own  side.  The  Prison 
of  each  side  is  opposite  the  Base  of  the  other  side,  as  shown  in 
the  diagrams.  No  one  is  allowed  to  touch  the  catcher  as  he 
returns  to  his  Base,  which  he  must  do  at  once.  A  prisoner  can 
be  released  by  any  one  of  his  friends  who  can  run  from  his 
Base  to  the  Prison  without  being  caught.  (When  more  than  one 
player  is  in  Prison  they  may  link  hands,  and  reach  out  into 
the  playing  space,  the  man  touched  being  the  only  one  released  ) 
The  prisoner  and  his  friend  may  then  return  to  their  Base  in 
safety.  But  if  a  player  is  caught  while  attempting  a  release  he 
must  himself  go  to  Prison.  The  game  is  won  by  the  party  that 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic   Games  35 

succeeds  in  getting  all  its  enemies  into  Prison  at  the  same  time. 
It  is  necessary  for  a  player  to  remember  who  of  his  opponents 
left  their  Base  before  him  and  who  after  him,  so  that  he  may 
know  whom  to  chase  and  whom  to  avoid.  When  a  large  number 
of  players  are  out  of  bound  this  makes  the  game  quite  com- 
plicated. 

Ham — Ham — Chicken — Ham—  Bacon 

This  game  is  played  by  the  youths  of  Washington,  D.  C,  on 
the  streets,  using  the  curbs  as  goals.  The  game  can  well  be 
applied  to  the  gymnasium,  however,  using  the  mats  at  either 
end  of  the  floor  or  a  chalk  line  at  either  end. 

All  the  players  congregate  on  one  side.  One  player  in  the 
centre  endeavors  to  make  them  step  off  the  curb  by  shouting, 
"Ham — Ham — Chicken — Ham — Bacon,"  the  word  "bacon"  being 
the  signal  for  all  to  cross  to  the  other  side,  while  he  endeavors 
to  catch  one.  The  one  caught  must  help  him  catch  the  others. 
If  any  one  steps  off  before  the  centre  man  says  "Bacon"  he  has 
to  go  to  the  aid  of  the  catcher.  For  instance,  the  trick  is  adopted 
of  shouting,  "Ham — Ham — Chicken — Ham"  and  stopping  short 
and  causing  some  one  to  step  off.  Or  of  substituting  other  words 
for  "Bacon,"  which  may  draw  some  one  from  their  base.  When 
all  are  caught  the  game  begins  anew. 


Puss  in  the  Corner 

This  game  may  well  be  applied  to  the  gymnasium  for  a  large 
number,  using  various  obstructions  as  corners.  If,  when  the 
change  is  made  from  one  corner  to  the  other,  more  than  half  the 
distance  is  covered,  the  "puss"  is  obliged  to  continue,  thus 
crowding  the  other  "puss"  from  his  corner  and  enabling  the 
catcher  to  obtain  a  vacant  corner,  only  one  "puss"  being  allowed 
in  a  corner  at  a  time.  The  catcher  tries  to  get  into  the  empty 
corners,  forcing  the  others  out.  The  "puss"  caught  or  left  with- 
out a  corner  is  "it." 


36  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet 

Group  Play 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  II.,  No.  18,  p.  118.) 

Any  multiple  of  three,  four  or  five  can  engage.  The  players 
having  been  divided  into  corresponding  groups  march  (if  five 
groups  have  been  formed)  to  the  four  corners  of  a  large  square 
(the  room),  one  of  the  groups  forming  in  the  centre  of  the 
square.  The  position  of  each  of  the  five  groups  must  be  sharply 
defined  by  chalk  lines  on  the  floor,  i.  e.,  for  each  group  a  house 
(small  square)  should  be  drawn  within  the  walls  of  which  the 
respective  group  players  must  be  stationed.  Any  one  of  the 
players  now  leaves  his  group  and  proceeds  t'oward  the  centre 
group,  whereupon  a  player  from  any  other  group  immediately 
sefks  to  fill  the  place  made  vacant  by  the  first  player.  Other 
players  now  make  similar  attempts  to  fill  the  vacancies  ensuing 
in  the  different  groups.  Meanwhile  the  player  who  began  the 
game  bestirs  himself  to  get  a  place  in  any  one  of  the  squares. 
Should  the  game,  at  any  time,  come  to  a  halt  because  all  the 
squares  are  filled,  then  the  last  player  to  enter  a  square  selects 
the  next  leader.  The  game  is  readily  understood  with  a  little 
practice,  and  may  be  changed  in  a  number  of  ways,  the  players 
walking,  hopping  or  running  from  place  to  place,  etc. 

Garden   Scamp 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  2,  p.  13.) 

Players  form  a  ring  grasping  hands  sideward.  One  of  the 
players,  on  the  outside,  says,  "Who  let  you  in  my  garden?"  to 
which  the  scamp  replies,  "No  one,"  and  runs,  the  gardener  giving 
chase.  He  may  be  armed  with  the  "beetle"  or  towel  as  in  Whip 
Tag.  He  is  obliged  to  follow  the  "scamp"  through  the  open- 
ings, performing  all  the  movements,  as  jumping  over  one  player, 
crawling  between  the  legs  of  another,  somersaults,  etc.  The 
chase  ends  with  the  scamp  being  caught,  or  when  the  gardener 
loses  track  of  him,  by  performing  the  wrong  movement  in  some 
way.  The  physical  director,  referee  or  players  may  decide. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  37 

Link  Chase 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  3,  p.  15.) 

Two  players  link  hands  and  attempt  to  tag  some  of  the  sur- 
rounding players.  All  players  tagged  take  their  places  between 
the  two  first  players,  the  chain  growing  longer  with  each  new 
addition.  The  outstanding  players  can  break  the  chain  if  pressed 
too  closely.  If  successful  in  this,  those  forming  the  chain  must 
run  to  base  to  unite  again,  the  other  players  tagging  or  riding 
(straddling)  them  by  jumping  on  their  backs  while  on  their  way 
to  the  base.  Players  stepping  out  to  rest  must- not  leave  bases. 
The  last  two  players  caught  must  begin  the  game  anew. 

Battering  Ram 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  III.,  No.  25,  p.  17.) 
Players  form  a  circle,  joining  hands,  one  of  their  number  being 
inside  and  one  outside  of  the  same.  The  centre  player  attempts 
to  escape  from  within  the  circle  by  jumping  over  or  by  passing 
quickly  under  the  arms  of  the  players,  or  by  breaking  through, 
the  player  on  the  outside  assisting  him  in  any  way  he  can.  Upon 
his  escape  the  player  who  is  most  responsible  takes  his  place 
within  the  circle. 

Day  and    Night 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  IV.,  No.  40,  p.  90.) 
Players  divided  into  two  parties,  formed  in  two  lines,  back  to 
back,  about  three  paces  apart,  as  shown  in  cut. 


oooooooo 

O      0      O 

One  of  the   lines   is   named   the   "Day    Party,"   the   other   the 
"Night   Party."     The  leader  has  a  disk  painted  black  on   on* 


38  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

side  and  white  on  the  other.  (A  coin  may  be  used  instead  of 
the  disk.)  In  front  of  each  party  is  a  goal.  The  leader  throws 
the  disks  into  the  air.  If  the  white  side  is  up  when  the  disk 
has  alighted  he  cries  out,  "Day."  The  "Day  Party"  then  -rushes 
toward  its  goal  and  the  "Night  Party"  pursues,  tagging  as  many 
members  of  the  "Day  Party"  as  possible.  These  they  take  back 
to  their  own  goal.  The  captured  members  are  now  out  of  the 
game.  The  sides  now  change,  the  disk  is  thrown  again,  and 
the  party  whose  side  turns  up  starts  for  goal  as  before.  The 
game  continues  in  this  way  until  all  the  players  on  one  of  the 
sides  are  out. 


Siege 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  7,  p.  16.) 

'The  party  is  divided  equally.  One  side  (determined  by  toss 
of  a  coin)  has  possession  of  the  field,  and  is  distributed  over 
the  same  in  such  a  manner  that  each  player  has  ample  room  to 
move  about.  The  other  side,  on  the  outside  of  the  field  (a  chalk 
line  six  feet  from  the  wall,  around  the  room),  surrounds  it  by 
movements  calculated  to  engage  as  many  of  the  enemy  in  the 
contest,  from  as  many  points  as  possible.  The  game  consists  in 
overpowering  the  enemy,  and  making  as  many  prisoners  as  possi- 
ble. The  stronger  players  must  cope  with  their  equals,  the 
weaker  ones  with  their  kind.  Wrestling  on  the  ground  or  drag- 
ging is  not  to  be  permitted.  If,  by  means  of  pulling,  pushing 
or  carrying,  without  interference  of  a  third  party,  a  player  suc- 
ceeds in  forcing  his  opponent  from  the  battlefield,  such  van- 
quished opponent  must  repair  to  the  prisoners'  guard  without.  If 
a  player  from  outside  the  field  is  brought  safely  within  (a  dis- 
tance of  five  feet  on  either  side  of  the  line  determining  the 
outcome)  he  must  repair  to  the  prisoners'  guard  within  (on  the 
centre  of  the  field).  Prisoners  who  escape  from  their  guards 
unseen  cannot  participate  in  the  game  again,  but  must  remain 
outside  of  the  playground. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  39 

Running  for  Places 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  6,  p.  16.) 

Form  circle  and  number  off  in  threes.  A  corresponding  num- 
ber of  players,  not  numbered,  are  in  the  centre  of  the  circle. 
These  alternately  call  out  a  number,  whereupon  all  players  hold- 
ing such  numbers  must  quickly  exchange  places,  the  player 
having  called  the  number  striving  to  catch  one  of  the  running 
numbers.  If  he  succeeds  in  catching  one  he  takes  his  place  and 
another  player  calls  out  a  number. 

Front  Duty 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  n,  p.  16.) 

The  players  select  two  leaders  whose  generalship  throughout 
the  game  can  be  relied  upon.  The  leaders,  in  turn,  enlist  their 
followers,  and  the  ranks  of  both  sides  filled,  the  opposing  forces 
march  in  opposite  directions  and  fly  their  respective  standards 
above  their  camps.  The  forces  bivouacing  soon  become  deeply 
interested  in  an  engagement  between  the  outposts  or  pickets, 
of  whom  a  number  have  been  placed  on  guard  by  each  com- 
mander at  a  short  distance  from  camps.  The  outcome  is  finally 
decided  when  one  of  the  combatants  has  been  overpowered  and 
brought  within  the  enemy's  picket  line.  The  struggle  between 
the  outposts  continues  until  the  last  on  either  side  return  to 
their  camp  to  report  that  the  enemy  is  in  sight.  Immediately 
a  line  of  battle  is  formed,  the  players  in  single  or  double  lines  in 
front  locking  arms  or  grasping  hands,  the  command  to  "Charge" 
following.  Amidst  songs  and  shouts  and  the  din  of  battle  the 
hosts  meet.  The  side  which  is  successful  in  forcing  its  oppo- 
nents to  retreat  a  given  distance  wins  the  battle. 

Bull  in  the  Ring,  or  Hare 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.   n,  p.  16.)  . 

All  form  circle  around  the  hare.  The  hare  now  tries  to  escape 
by  all  possible  means.  Should  he  succeed  the  players  pursue 
him,  the  one  first  catching  him  becoming  hare  in  the  next  game. 


4O  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Black  Man 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  II,  p.  16.) 

"Black  man"  at  one  end  of  the  floor,  players  at  other.  If 
the  "black  man,"  while  running  to  the  goal  which  the  players 
have  left,  taps  a  player  such  player  must  help  him  be  "black 
man."  The  "black  man"  and  all  who  have  been  caught  in  this 
way  may  grasp  hands. 

Tender   Green 

(German- American  Gymnastics,  Stecher,  p.  320.) 

The  game  is  very  like  "Black  Man,"  in  some  places  called  so. 
It  differs  from  "Black  Man"  in  that  the  one  who  is  "it"  must 
fold  his  hands  and  must  tag  one  or  more  of  the  other  players 
in  this  position  only.  After  he  has  caught  one  or  more  of  the 
players  they  must  join  hands,  and  the  end  players  only  are 
allowed  to  tag  the  other  players,  the  other  players  having  a  right 
»o  break  through  the  line  if  they  can.  When  all  the  players  are 

tught  the  first  one  tagged  is  "it." 

Blind  Man's  Buff 

This  game  needs  no  description.  Care  should  be  taken  that 
the  blind  man  does  not  injure  himself  against  the  walls. 

Fox 

This  is  a  game  in  which  knotted  handkerchiefs  are  required. 
A  small  base  called  "The  Den"  is  marked  out  and  one  of  the 
players,  elected  by  chance  or  otherwise,  takes  his  station  within 
it  and  represents  the  "Fox."  When  the  "Fox"  is  ready  he  calls 
out,  "Twice  five  are  ten,"  which  sapient  remark  is  answered  by 
the  out  players  with  "Fox,  come  out  of  your  den."  Fox  imme- 
diately complies  with  this  request  and  hops  out,  endeavoring  to 
touch  one  of  the  players  who  dodge  around  him  and  do  their 
best,  without  touching  him,  to  make  him  put  both  feet  to  the 
ground,  which  entitled  them  to  give  him  a  good  drubbing  with 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  41 

their  knotted  handkerchiefs  while  he  is  running  home.  If  the 
Fox  can  touch  one  of  his  would-be  tormentors  while  he  is  hop- 
ping the  player  touched  becomes  Fox. 

Lame  Goose 

(German- American  Gymnastics,   Stecher,  p.  318.) 

A  goal  is  selected  to  which  one  of  the  players,  called  "Lame 
Goose,"  repairs.  The  other  players  call  out  to  him,  "Lame  goose, 
lame  goose,  can't  catch  anybody"  and  run  up  and  down  in  front 
of  his  goal,  tantalizing  him  in  all  manners  conceivable.  "Can't 
I,  though,"  replies  the  Lame  Goose,  and  starts  after  the  players. 
He  must  not,  however,  run  after  them,  but  must  take  three 
steps  only  and  then  hop  on  one  leg,  and  as  soon  as  he  "breaks" 
all  the  players  rush  at  him  and  drive  him  to  his  goal,  pommelling 
him  on  the  back  with  their  fists,  until  he  has  reached  it.  If,  how- 
ever, the  lame  goose  succeeds  in  tagging  one  of  the  players  he 
joins  the  other  players  in  driving  the  one  tagged  to  the  goal,  a," 
described  above,  and  the  player  tagged  is  "it." 

Sculptor 

(German- American   Gymnastics,   Stecher,  p.  316.) 

One  of  the  players,  called  the  "Sculptor,"  arranges  the  other 
players  in  different  positions  and  attitudes  as  statues.  No  player 
dares  move  or  speak,  for  as  soon  as  he  does  the  sculptor  punishes 
him  by  beating  him  with  a  knotted  handkerchief  or  towel  (the 
sack-beetle).  After  having  arranged  the  players  to  suit  his 
fancy  the  sculptor  leaves  the  playground,  saying :  "The  sculptor 
is  not  at  home."  No  sooner  is  he  gone  than  the  statues  come  to 
life,  sing,  dance,  jump  and  play  havoc  in  general.  On  the  return 
of  the  sculptor  he  counts,  "One,  two,  three,"  and  any  player  who 
is  not  in  his  former  posture  at  "three"  receives  a  beating  with 
the  knotted  handkerchief  from  the  sculptor.  Should  the  sculptor 
punish  the  wrong  statue  all  the  players  rush  at  him  with  knotted 
handkerchiefs  and  drive  him  to  a  goal  previously  decided  upon, 
and  the  game  is  resumed  with  some  other  player  as  sculptor. 


43  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet 

The  King's  Run 

(German- American  Gymnastics,  Stecher,  p.  320.) 

Two  sides,  divided  as  equally  as  possible  in  regard  to  numbers 
and  strength,  stand  at  a  convenient  distance  opposite  each  other, 
the  players  grasping  hands  firmly.  Each  side  has  a  captain  or 
king,  as  he  is  sometimes  called,  who  stands  at  the  left  end  of 
the  line.  At  his  command  one  of  the  players  runs  with  all  his 
might  and  tries  to  break  through  the  enemy's  line.  If  he  suc- 
ceeds all  the  players  cut  off  from  the  captain's  end  of  the  line 
must  cross  over  and  join  the  other  side.  If  he  fails  he  must 
join  the  enemy's  side.  The  other  side  then  sends  out  one  of 
their  men,  and  so  on,  until  but  one  man,  the  king,  is  left.  He 
is  allowed  three  trials  to  break  through  the  enemy's  line  and 
redeem  his  fallen  fortunes ;  but  if  in  three  times  he  does  not 
succeed  his  side  has  lost  the  game.  To  make  the  game  shorter 
the  players  cut  off  from  their  own  line  and  the  runners  who  fail 
to  break  through  the  enemy's  line  are  out  of  the  game  until  it 
is  ended. 

Follow  My  Leader 

(Sports  and  Pastimes  of  American  Boys,  Chadwick.) 

A  bold,  active  boy  should  be  selected  as  leader,  and  all  the 
other  players  must  arrange  themselves  in  a  line  behind  him.  He 
commences  the  game  by  jumping,  running,  hopping  or  getting 
over  any  obstacle  that  may  present  itself,  and  then  continues  his 
course,  scrambling  over  everything  and  varying  his  actions  as 
much  as  possible ;  all  his  followers  must,  according  to  the  rules 
of  the  game,  do  exactly  as  he  does.  If  any  one  fails  in  perform- 
ing the  tasks  he  must  take  his  place  behind  all  the  rest  until 
some  other  player  makes  a  blunder  and  in  his  turn  goes  last. 

Bull  in  the  Ring,  and  Sheep  Fold 

In  "Bull  in  the  Ring"  one  takes  his  place  in  the  centre  of  the 
circle  and  endeavors  to  break  out.  Upon  doing  so,  the  rest 
chase  him,  the  one  catching  him  taking  his  place  as  bull. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic -Games  43 

A  similar  circle  is  formed  for  "Sheep  Fold,"  the  sheep  inside, 
and  the  wolf  out.  The  wolf  attempts  to  break  through  the 
joined  hands  so  as  to  reach  the  lamb,  but  if  he  does  so,  the 
sheep-fold  opens  on  the  opposite  side  letting  the  lamb  out  and 
closing  the  wolf  in.  The  latter  now  tries  in  the  same  manner 
to  get  out,  and  if  he  does  so,  the  lamb  is  admitted 
again.  If  the  wolf  succeeds  in  catching  the  lamb,  the 
two  players  between  whom  he  broke  through  the  sheep  fold 
last,  become  the  wolf  and  lamb  in  their  turn. 

Leap- Frog  Games 

All  are  familiar  with  the  ordinary  leap-frog  where  the  players 
stand  side  by  side,  in  which  case  the  leaper  goes  over  them  side- 
wise,  or  they  stand  in  file,  in  which  case  he  leaps  from  their 
backs  over  their  heads.  When  he  has  thus  gone  over  the  whole 
line,  he  makes  a  back  and  the  player  who  is  thus  left  in  the 
rear,  becomes  the  leaper. 

For  competition  the  players  may  be  divided  equally,  forming 
two  lines.  At  the  word  "Go,"  the  two  rear  players  jump  swiftly 
over  the  backs  of  the  players  in  front.  When  every  player  has 
jumped  over  the  back  of  every  other  player,  that  line  has  com- 
pleted its  work  and,  if  ahead  of  the  other  line,  wins  the  race. 
A  most  interesting  game  if  given  a  fair  trial.  The  same  game 
may  be  played  crawling  between  the  legs  instead  of  jumping 
over  the  backs. 

Foot  and  a  Half 

The  person  to  be  jumped  over  moves  by  degrees  farther  and 
farther  from  the  point  where  the  jump  begins.  A  line  is  drawn 
(sometimes  called  the  "Garter")  to  mark  where  the  jump  begins, 
and  whoever  steps  on  it  must  take  the  place  of  the  player  leaped 
over.  After  the  players  in  turn  have  leaped,  the  last  cries  "Foot 
and  a  Half!"  and  the  player  who  is  making  the  back  thereupon 
places  his  right  heel  in  the  hollow  of  his  left  foot,  advances  the 
latter  so  that  its  hollow  covers  his  right  toe  and  then  brings 


44  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

up  his  right  foot  to  its  original  position.  The  players  then  leap 
again,  always  beginning  at  the  "Garter,"  after  which  the  back 
advances  again  in  like  manner,  and  the  game  goes  on  until  some 
one  treads  on  the  "Garter"  or  fails  in  leaping.  The  unsuc- 
cessful one  then  makes  a  back  and  another  game  begins.  This 
game  is  also  called  "Fly  the  Garter"  and  "Foot  It." 

Sometimes  it  is  varied  by  allowing  the  last  player  in  the  first 
round  to  make  a  back  at  the  spot  he  reaches  in  his  jump.  The 
back  thus  changes  at  each  round,  and  as  the  position  is  move'l 
forward  such  a  distance  each  time,  the  players  are  often  allowed 
one  jump  or  a  hop,  skip  and  jump  between  the  garter  and  the 
back. 

French  boys  play  one  called  "Sant  de  Mouton  avec  Mouchoirs" 
("Sheep's  Leap  with  Handerchiefs")  in  which  each  leaper  is  re- 
quired, in  his  first  turn,  to  lay  his  handkerchief  on  the  back  of 
the  player  he  leaps  over,  and  at  his  second  turn  to  pick  off  his 
own  handkerchief,  leaving  the  others.  He  who  fails  makes  a  back 
for  the  others. 

Tag  Game 

Played  by  any  number  of  persons  one  whom  tries  to  "tag"  or 
touch  any  of  the  others  he  can.  If  he  succeeds,  the  one  tagged 
must  take  his  place.  When  "tag"  succeeds  in  touching  another, 
he  cries  "No  tag,"  which  signifies  that  the  player  so  touched 
must  not  touch  the  player  who  touched  him  until  he  has  chased 
and  touched  somebody  else.  No  player  can  be  tagged  when 
touching  the  "goal"  which  is  any  object  agreed  upon,  such  as  a 
portion  of  a  wall,  etc.  Or  if  the  boys  pursued  can  touch  either 
wood  or  iron,  they  are  safe,  the  rule  being  that  he  must  touch 
them  as  they  run  from  one  piece  of  wood  or  iron  to  another. 

Cross  Tag 

Any  player  who  is  chased  can  be  relieved  by  any  other  player 
running  between  him  and  the  one  trying  to  tag  him.  The  latter 
must  then  run  after  the  player  who  ran  between,  till  he  in  turn 
is  relieved. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic   Games  45 

Squat  Tag 

When  a  player  who  is  pursued  is  tired,  he  is  allowed  to  stoop 
or  squat  close  to  the  ground,  the  pursuer  not  being  allowed  to 
touch  him  in  this  position.  The  number  of  squats  allowed  varies 
from  two  to  eleven. 


King's  Land 

One,  representing  the  king,  stands  the  within  the  boundaries 
agreed  upon  at  the  beginning  of  the  game.  The  other  players 
can  be  touched  by  him  only  when  they  venture  inside  the  boun- 
dary. By  running  in  and  out  again  on  all  sides,  they  strive  to 
confuse  the  king  and  divert  his  attention  from  one  to  the  other. 
In  Connecticut  the  forbidden  land  is  someti'mes  called  "Van 
Diemen's  land;"  in  New  York,  "Dixie's -Land ;"  in  Philadelphia, 
"Golden  Pavement ;"  in  Devonshire,  England,  "Judge  Jeffrey's 
Land,"  and  the  old  English  name  for  it  was  "Tom  Tiddler's 
Ground."  The  French  call  the  king  "Crow." 


Sailor's  Tag 

All  should  be  blindfolded.  Place  a  knotted  handkerchief  or 
towel  in  the  hand  of  each  player.  The  players  may  be  divided 
off  in  pairs,  if  desired.  They  then  attempt  to  strike  each  other, 
blowing  a  whistle  or  crying  "Here"  after  every  strike.  The  one 
who  crys  out  then  moves  away  quickly,  while  the  opponent  slashes 
furiously  at  the  place  where  the  sound  came  from  or  where  he 
thinks  the  other  may  be.  Exceedingly  laughable. 


Blind  Man's  Biff 

Place  boxing  gloves  on  one,  or  a  number  of  pairs  of  player 
(blindfolded),  and  let  them  "biff"  each  other. 


46 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Hang  Tag 


(W.   H.  Kinnicutt,  M.D.,  Physical   Director  Cleveland 
Y.   M.    C.    A.) 

This  changes  at  once  from  an  imbecile  to  an  intensely  active 
and  interesting  game  by  introducing  this  change  :  Any  apparatus 
allowed  for  hanging;  only  one  person  allowed  at  a  time  upon 


IX 


80 


O 
A 


Starter 
I 


o 
a. 


5 
O 


O  9 


o  n 


o 

15 


a  support  and  the  last  one  assuming  the  hanging  position  has 
the  claim,  causing  the  former  possessor  to  secure  another  sup- 
port in  order  to  be  safe.  A  player  cannot  be  caught  when  his 
feet  do  not  touch  the  floor  or  mat. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  47 

RACING    GAMES 
Three  Indian  Club  Race 

Each  player  has  three  clubs  placed  in  front  of  him  at  one  end 
of  the  gymnasium.     He  must  take  the  clubs,  one  at  a  time,  and 
place  them  behind  a  certain  line  at  the  other  end  of  the  gym- 
nasium and  return  to  the  starting  line.     If  a  man  fails  to  place 
a  club  properly  or  stand  it  up,  he  must  return  and  do  so  before 
winning  or  completing  the  race. 
Another  form  of  the  "Club  Race"  is  as  follows: 
The  vertical  line  is  the  scratch  from  which  the  runners  start 
and  to  which  they  run  to  finish  the  race.     The  square  dots  are 
spots  on  which  the  clubs  are  stood  prior  to  starting  the  runners. 


The  club  each  runner  carries  is  made  to  stand  over  the  crosses 
before  another  club  can  be  picked  up.  The  semicircular  lines  in- 
dicate the  enclosures  in  which  all  the  clubs  must  stand  before  the 
final  dash  to  the  scratch  is  made. 

Club   Hustle 

Divide  players  equally.  Form  ranks  in  "front  dress."  Place 
an  Indian  club  in  the  hand  of  each  foremost  man.  At  the  word, 
"Go,"  he  stoops  and  passes  the  club  between  his  legs  to  player 
behind  him,  who  continues  it  on  down  the  line.  When  the  rear 
player  receives  it,  he  runs  to  the  head  of  the  line  and  starts  it 
again.  When  every  player  has  thus  been  at  the  head  of  the  line 
and  the  original  starter  has  received  the  club  at  the  foot  of  the 


48  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gym-iastic  Games 

line,  and  placed  it  in  an  upright  position  at  the  head  of  the  line, 
the  game  is  over.     The  side  that  completes  the  circuit  first  wins. 
A    little   thought   and    ingenuity   will   suggest   numerous   ways 
of  varying  the  sport,  but  a  few  suggestions  are  herewith  given. 

(1)  At  the  signal,  the  club  is  grasped  with  the  left  hand  and 
passed  down  the  line,   being  touched  only  by  the  left  hand  of 
each  man.     The  rear  man  passes  it  behind  him  and  it  is  then 
passed  forward  by  the  right  hands  alone.    The  first  man  sets  the 
club  down  across  the  line  where  it  must  remain  standing  or  no 
point  is  made.     If  any  but  the  one  hand  touches  the  club  on  its 
journey,  a  foul  is  counted,  or  the  line  wins  that  first  gets  the 
club  to  its  place  without  fouling. 

(2)  Any  number  of  clubs,  say  six,  can  be  passed  in  the  same 
way.    All  the  clubs  must  be  replaced  across  the  line  and  remain 
standing  before  a  side  can  score. 

(3).  One  club  can  zig  zag  down  and  back,  the  first  man  grasping 
the  club  with  his  left  hand  and  passing  it  behind  him  to  his 
neighbor's  right  and  so  on.  The  rear  man  must  pass  it  around 
behind  him  before  starting  it  forward. 


Indian  Club  Circle  Pull 

Form  a  circle,  grasping  hands.  Place  as  many  clubs  as  there 
are  players  inside  the  circle,  in  such  a  position  that  the  players 
may  move  about  them  freely.  Indicate  which  way  the  circle  shall 
revolve,  and  start.  Each  man  endeavors  to  make  his  neighbor 
knock  down  a  pin  by  pulling  him  into  them.  Knocking  down  two 
pins  causes  the  displacement  of  a  player,  taking  a  pin  with  him. 


RACES 
Short  Dash 

Run  in  heats  of  four,  any  distance  compatible  with  the  floor- 
space.  First  two  men  run  in  the  second  round,  semi-final  or 
final. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  49 

Y,  M.  C.  A.  Potato  Race 

(Rules  found  in  the  Official  Handbook  of  the  Athletic  League 
of  the  Young  Men's  Christian  Associations  of  North  America.) 

Potato  Race 

All  are  acquainted  with  the  old-fashioned  potato-race,  where 
an  equal  number  of  potatoes  for  each  player  are  placed  in  a 
line  (as  in  the  Indian  Club  Race,  just  described),  the  race  being 
finished  or  won  when  all  the. potatoes  (one  at  a  time)  are  placed 
in  the  receptacle  at  the  starting  line  and  the  final  dash  made  for 
the  finishing  line.  Rules  found  in  the  Official  Handbook  of  the 
Amateur  Athletic  Union. 

Relay  (Pursuit)  Race 

For  a  running  track,  two  teams  of  any  equal  number  may  enjoy 
this  race.  One  team  assembles  at  one  end  of  the  track  and  one 
at  the  other.  One  runner  from  each  team  is  selected  and  started 
at  the  same  time,  both  going  in  the  same  direction.  Any  num- 
ber of  laps  may  be  completed  (we  will  say  two)  when  another 
runner  stands  ready  to  tap  the  hand  of  his  mate  and  complete 
two  laps,  endeavoring  to  catch  the  opponent.  If  one  side  catches 
the  other  before  all  have  run,  that  side  wins,  or  the  side  that 
finishes  its  circuit  first  wins.  Or  the  pursuit  may  be  continued, 
the  first  runner  taking  up  the  running  again  for  his  team  and  so 
continuing  until  one  side  catches  the  other.  The  wildest  excite- 
ment prevails  and  close  watch  will  need  be  kept  for  fairness. 


Obstacle  Race 

Place  a  number  of  pieces  of  apparatus  around  gymnasium,  to 
be  clambered  or  jumped  over.  Run  two  players  at  a  time,  nar- 
rowing it  down  to  a  final  heat. 


5O  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet 

Human  Race 

Divide  off  in  pairs.  One  player  carries  another  from  one  end 
of  the  gymnasium  across  a  certain  line,  when  he  in  turn  is  picked 
up  by  him  who  was  carried,  and  returned  across  the  starting 
line.  This  may  be  run  in  heats  and  finals,  thus  increasing  the 
interest. 

Wheelbarrow  Race 

Divide  off  in  pairs.  One  player  takes  the  other  by  the  feet, 
forming  a  wheelbarrow.  He  who  pushes  his  barrow  (who,  of 
course,  runs  on  his  hands)  across  the  finish  line,  at  the  other 
end  of  the  gymnasium  first,  wins.  Heats  and  finals,  if  desired. 

Knapsack   Race 

Each  player  stands  inside  a  cloth  meal  sack,  holding  the  bag 
up  with  his  hands.  Heats  and  finals. 

Hopping  Race 

On  one*foot  (right  or  left)  or  both  feet.     Heats  and  finals. 

Chariot  Race 

Two  locking  arms  and  racing  two  others  around  the  hall. 
Three  or  four  abreast  may  be  used.  Breaking  hold  gives  race  to 
other  party.  Heats  and  finals. 

Tug  of  War 

The  tug  may  be  pulled  in  two  ways ;  in  the  first,  there  is  no 
limit  of  time,  but  the  teams  pull  until  one  has  pulled  the  other 
over  a  given  line;  in  the  second,  the  pulling  is  for  a  certain 
number  of  minutes,  and  at  the  end  of  that  time  the  team  wins 
on  whose  side  the  middle  of  the  rope  is.  In  both  methods  the 
middle  of  the  rope  is  marked,  usually  by  tying  a  piece  of  colored 
cloth  around  it  and  a  person  acting  as  judge  or  referee  holds  it 
exactly  over  the  line,  as  he  gives  the  signal  to  begin  pulling. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  51 

Standard  rules  for  Tug-of-War  may  be  found  in  the  official 
handbook  of  the  Amateur  Athletic  Union,  published  in  Spalding's 
Athletic  Library,  by  American  Sports  Publishing  Company,  16-18 
Park  Place,  New  York. 

A  simpler  method,  if  a  rope  is  not  accessible,  is  as  follows: 
Any  number  of  boys  standing  behind  each  other,  facing  the 
center  of  their  line  (one-half  of  their  number  on  each  side  of  the 
centre),  place  their  arms  around  the  waist  of  the  front  player  and 
lock  or  clasp  hands,  taking  the  best  attitude  for  the  exercise  to 
follow.  The  two  strongest  boys,  who 'were  selected  for  the  centre 
stays,  place  their  right  arm  over  each  other's  left  shoulder,  lock- 
ing or  grasping  their  hands  or  wrists  on  their  backs.  The  pulling 
is  frequently  continued  when  the  players  are  on  the  floor. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet 


PART    II. 


GAMES   FOR   A   FEW 
Scrimmage  Ball 

(E.  D.  Angell,  Plattsburgh,  N.  Y.) 

Floor  plan  like  following  sketch.  A  floor  marked  for  basket 
ball  can  be  used.  The  ball  should  be  a  medicine  ball  weighing 
from  four  pounds  upward.  There  should  be  an  even  number  of 
men  on  each  side,  half  of  each  team  acting  as  forwards  and  the 
other  half  as  guards. 

THE  GAME. 

The  ball  is  placed  on  the  floor  half  way  between  the  two  goals. 
The  players  line  up  back  of  their  respective  goals. 

a  a 


• 

b             b 

• 

0 

o 

• 

c 

• 

0 

• 

o 

o 

• 

* 

>         < 

) 

o 

0 

0 

a  a 

Positions  of  two  Scrimmage  Ball  teams  of  eight  men  each  at  beginning  of  game 
and  also  floor  plan.     Guards  step  up  to  the  line  after  forwards  rush  for  the  ball. 
•—Forwards.     O— Guards.     A-A— Goal  Line.     B-B— Foul  Line.     C— Ball. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet  53 

At  a  signal  from'  the  referee,  the  forwards  from  each  team 
rush  for  the  ball  and  try  to  get  it  across  their  opponents'  goal  line 
by  pushing,  or  scrimmaging  it  along  with  one  hand.  The  guards 
of  each  team  must  remain  back  of  their  respective  goal  lines  and 
act  as  goal  defenders.  When  a  goal  is  made  the  ball  is  placed 
in  the  centre  of  the  field  again  and  at  the  referee's  signal,  the 
guards  rush  for  the  ball  and  the  forzvards  become  guards,  and 
so  on  throughout  the  game,  the  guards  and  forwards  changing 
positions  at  the  end  of  each  goal.  The  guards  must  remain  back 
of  their  goal  line  and  in  defending  goal  are  allowed  to  place  one 
foot  in  front  of  goal  line.  If  they  step  over  the  goal  line  with 
both  feet  to  block  a  play  it  is  a  foul. 

Fouls. — All  rough  play  such  as  hitting,  pushing,  tackling,  etc., 
propelling  the  ball  with  both  hands  at  the  same  time,  picking  up 
the  ball  and  throwing  it,  kicking  the  ball,  or  blocking  with  any 
part  of  the  body  except  the  hand.  A  player  cannot  hit  the  bail 
when  he  is  down.  When  a  man  falls,  he  must  be  on  his  feet 
before  he  can  touch  the  ball  again.  Violation  of  this  rule  is  a 
foul. 

Penalty  for  fouls. — When  a  foul  is  made,  the  forwards  from 
the  offended  side  are  allowed  to  "kick  a  goal."  The  offenders 
must  retire  back  of  their  goal  line  while  the  forwards  stand  in 
front  of  the  goal  on  the  foul  line.  (See  diagram.)  The  ball 
is  thrown  into  the  air  by  one  of  the  forwards  while  another  of 
the  forwards  tries  to  bat  it  across  the  goal  line  as  it  descends. 
The  forward  that  throws  up  the  ball  cannot  bat  it.  The  side  that 
committed  the  foul  try  to  prevent  a  goal  by  knocking  the  ball 
back  into  the  field  of  play.  If  the  ball  touches  the  floor  back 
of  the  goal,  it  is  a  goal  and  counts  one  point  for  the  side  that 
"kicked  the  goal,"  but  if  the  ball  is  blocked  and  lands  in  front 
of  the  goal  line  it  is  again  in  play  (the  same  as  in  Basket  Ball), 
and  the  forwards  from  each  team  rush  for  the  ball  and  continue 
the  game  as  before.  A  regular  goal  from  the  field  counts  two 
points.  A  goal  on  a  foul  counts  one  point.  The  distance  of  the 
foul  line  from  the  goal  line  must  be  governed  by  the  weight  of 
the  ball.  The  game  should  be  played  in  two  halves  of  five  or  ten 


54  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

minutes'   duration.     There   is   no   off   side  play  and   no  out  of 
hounds. 

In  a  large  gymnasium  or  in  certain  circumstances,  bounds  may 
be  used,  the  man  touching  the  ball  first  putting  it  in  play  as  fol- 
lows :  Have  all  the  forwards  stand  at  least  ten  feet  from  the 
man  out  of  bounds  and  have  him  put  the  ball  in  play  by  scooping 
or  knocking  it  into  the  field.  The  chief  value  of  the  game  lies 
in  the  fact  that  no  man  has  a  more  important  position  than  any 
other  on  the  team.  As  they  become  forwards  and  guards  al- 
ternately, every  man  is  afforded  the  same  amount  of  exercise  and 
the  same  opportunity  to  distinguish  himself. 


Basket   Ball 

Rules  published  yearly  in  Spalding's  Athletic  Library,  by 
American  Sports  Publishing  Company,  16-18  Park  Place,  New 
York. 


Newcomb 

BY    CLARA    G.    BAER. 

HOW  TO  ARRANGE  THE  GAME. 

Divide  the  room  into  two  equal  parts  by  drawing  a  chalk  line 
across  the  floor.  This  is  called  the  Division  Line. 

About  seven  feet  each  side  of  this  line  draw  shorter  lines  for 
the  bases.  If  convenient,  it  might  be  well  to  draw  these  lines  with 
colored  chalk,  or  better  still,  have  both  division  line  and  bases 
pointed  on  the  floor  (black  paint  preferred)  in  lines  from  two 
to  three  inches  in  width.  The  space  between  the  bases,  separated 
by  the  division  line,  is  called  the  "inside"  of  the  base ;  beyond, 
where  the  players  stand,  "outside."  For  convenience  the  players 
are  designated  by  colors  (or  numbers).  .If  the  class  colors  are 
pink  and  blue,  one-half  of  the  class  play  pink,  the  other  blue. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 


The  blues  guard  the  ground  of  the  pinks,  and  vice  versa.  The 
players  are  arranged  at  irregular  intervals  beyond  the  bases, 
which  they  are  not  permitted  to  cross  except  where  the  ball  is 
thrown  up  by  the  referee  (the  instructor).  This  is  done  at  the 
beginning  of  the  game  to  decide  which  side  shall  have  possession 
of  the  ball  and  after  each  foul.  In  order  to  prevent  too  great 
a  rush  for  the  ball  it  is  well  for  each  side  to  elect  a  captain,  when 
the  captains  alone  are  permitted  to  cross  the  bases.  If  the  game 
is  played  on  the  field  and  boundary  lines  are  required,  the  ball 
is  declared  "out"  when  it  touches  outside  of  these  lines. 


u 

-. 

f 

1 

-f  . 

• 

K 

A 

PLAYERS  (BLUE)   -, 

9 

0    PLAYERS  (PINK) 

"^       •       «9 

§ 

i 

GROUND  (PINK) 

1 
i 

GROUND  (BLUE) 

0 

7  FT. 

7  FT. 

THE  OBJECT  OF  THE  GAME. 

Is  to  make  the  ball  touch  the  opposite  ground  beyond  the  base, 
when  it  is  called  a  "touch  down,"  and  counts  for  the  side  sending 
the  ball.  At  first  "touch  downs"  are  easily  made,  but  when  the 
players  become  expert  in  handling  the  ball  it  is  seldom  per- 
mitted to  reach  the  floor,  and  the  interest  in  the  game  increases 
proportionately. 

RULES. 

1.  The  players  shall  stand  outside  of  the  bases. 

2.  The  players  shall  not  step  inside  of  the  bases,  except  when 
the.  ball  is  thrown  up  at  the  beginning  of  the  game  and  after  each 
foul. 


56  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

3.  The  ball  must  be  thrown  by  the  hands.    It  may  be  thrown 
with  one  or  both  hands.     It  cannot  be  kicked. 

4.  No  player  shall  catch  or  throw  the  ball  while  on  her  knees. 
She  must  be  on  her  feet. 

5.  No  player  must  fall  on  the  ball. 

6.  A  "touch  down"  shall  count  one  for  the  side  sending  the 
ball.    A  foul  one  against  the  side  offending. 

7.  A  majority  of  points  shall  decide  the  game. 

8.  The    referee    shall    throw    the    ball    directly   upward    from 
division  line  at  the  beginning  of  each  game  and  after  each  foul. 

9.  The  referee  shall  decide  the  time,  keep  account  of  "touch 
down"  and  fouls. 

10.  If  a  ball  is  batted  inside  of  the  bases  by  a  player  recelv...., 
it,  it  is  declared  "out,"  and  is  again  thrown  up  by  the  referee. 
It  does  not  count  for,  or  against,  either  side. 

FOULS. 

1.  Throwing  the  ball  between  division  line  and  either  base. 

2.  Pushing  a  player  in  order  to  gain  possession  of  the  ball. 

3.  Violating  Rules  2,  3,  4  and  5. 

TACTICS. 

As  the  object  of  the  game  is  to  guard  the  ground  on  which 
you  stand,  cover  it  as  effectually  as  possible  by  even  distribution 
of  players,  taking  care  that  the  best  players  are  not  together. 
If  you  have  a  weak  spot  try  not  to  let  the  other  side  discover 
it,  or  they  will  throw  their  ball  in  that  direction.  Vary  youf 
plays.  For  a  time  aim  far  beyond  the  opposite  base,  then  of  a 
sudden  throw  the  bell  just  outside  the  bases.  This  is  a  difficult 
play  and  should  be  only  attempted  by  one  who  has  a  sure  aim, 
as  it  may  lead  to  a  foul.  For  long  distance,  throw  high  or  the 
ball  may  be  intercepted.  A  low  ball,  when  well  sent,  is  very 
effectual  for,  unless  a  player  has  her  movements  well  under  con- 
trol, in  stooping  she  is  apt  to  fall  on  the  ball,  which  is  a  foul 
against  her  side,  beside  the  "touch  down"  if  she  fails  to  catch 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  57 

the  ball.  Whenever  possible,  save  a  player  on  your  side  from 
the  possibility  of  violating  Rules  4  and  5.  Personally,  strive 
yourself  to  be  the  best ;  for  the  more  expert  the  individuals 
become,  the  better  will  be  the  playing  of  each  side  as  a  whole. 

Hand  Polo 

(Era,  1895,  page  129.) 
RULES. 

1.  Size  of  Team. — Each  team  shall  be  composed  of  five  or  six 
men,  according  to  the  size  of  the  floor  space. 

2.  Clothing   and   Shoes. — Players   must   wear   rubber  or   soft- 
soled  shoes  (not  leather  or  spikes).     No  one  can  wear  hooks  or 
any  buckles  that  are  liable  to  catch  in  coming  in  close  contact 
with  another  player. 

3.  Umpire  and  Referee. — There  shall  be  one  umpire  and  two 
referees   to   each  game.     The   umpire   shall   make   all   decisions, 
call  all  fouls,  place  ball  in  play,  keep  time;    shall  have  power  to 
warn  and  rule  off  the  floor  any  vicious  or  ungentlemanly  player, 
shall  settle  all  disputes  and  keep  account  of  fouls.    The  referees 
shall  watch  the  goals  and  call  goals  when  they  are  made. 

4.  Rules  in   Playing. — The  ball   shall  be  placed  in  the  centre 
of  the  floor,  at  an  equal  distance  from  each  goal.  Each  team  shall 
line  up  back  of  their  respective  goals.  At  a  signal  from  the  umpire 
both  teams  shall  rush  for  the  ball,  and  continue  to  play  until  the 
signal  to  stop  is  given  by  the  umpire.     (The  usual  time  is  fifteen 
minutes   innings  with  five  minutes   for  rest.)      When  a  goal  is 
made,  the  referee  shall  call  such  and  the  umpire  shall  give  the 
final  decision  whether  it  was  made  fairly  or  not.     No  one  has 
a  right  to  claim  or  call  goals  except  the  referee  and  umpire. 

5.  Fouls    among   the    Players. — Fouls    shall    be   called    by   the 
umpire.     Any  of  the  following  acts  shall  constitute  a  foul.     Any 
rough  interference   such  as  tripping,  catching,  holding,  kicking, 
hooking,  pushing,  stepping  upon  or  throwing  an  opponent,  is  a 
foul  and  shall  be  so  called  by  the  umpire;    the  ball  then  being 
passed  to  him  shall  again  be  put  in  play  by  picking  for  it  at  a 


58  Indoor  *and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

signal  from  the  umpire.  If  a  foul  is  made  within  the  distance 
of  ten  feet  from  the  goal,  it  shall  be  placed  ten  feet  to  the  side 
or  back  of  the  goal  and  there  picked  for.  The  goal  tender  can 
rest  on  both  knees.  No  one  is  allowed  to  lie  down  across  the 
front  of  the  goal.  Any  interference  with  the  goals  shall  con- 
stitute a  foul.  No  player  can  interfere  with  another  player  in 
any  way  when  that  one  is  more  than  six  feet  from  the  ball. 

Fouls  with  the  Ball. — The  following  shall  constitute  fouls  with 
the  ball :  Picking  it  up  with  the  hand,  closing  the  fingers  over 
it  on  the  floor,  holding  it  in  the  hand,  catching  it  while  it  is  in 
the  air,  kicking  it,  lying  on  it  intentionally  or  throwing  it. 

6.  Cost    of    Fouls. — Three    fouls    made    in    succession    by    one 
team  between  the  making  of  a  goal,   shall  constitute  one  goal 
less  on  the  erring  team ;    if  said  team  has  no  goal  to  their  credit, 
the  opposing  team  shall  have  one  goal  added  to  their  number. 
When  a  goal  is  made,  the  fouls  of  both  teams  shall  be  with- 
drawn. 

7.  Exchange  of  Position. — Whenever  a  goal  is  made  and  at  the 
end  of  every  inning,  the  teams  shall  exchange  positions. 

8.  Disabled. — When  a  player  becomes  hurt  in  any  way  necessi- 
tating the  calling  of  time,  two  minutes  shall  be  given  to  resume 
playing  before  another  player  takes  his  place. 

9.  Disputes. — If  any  misunderstanding  or  quarrel  shall  occur, 
the  umpire  shall  settle  such  matter  in  the  quietest  possible  manner 
according  to  his  own  judgment,  then  calling  upon  the  men  to 
play.     If  either  of  the.  teams  object  to  play  in  the  time  of  three 
minutes,   he   shall   proclaim  the   game  in    favor   of   the   obeying 
team. 

10.  Fair  Play. — The  only  fair  way  of  opposing  one  another  in 
playing,  is  by  shouldering  and  bucking,  which  can  only  be  done 
within  the  distance  of  six  feet  from  the  ball.     The  ball  must  be 
struck  with  the  open  hand,  not  the  fist,  or  any  mechanical  de- 
vice.   The  ball  can  be  stopped  with  any  part  of  the  body.    When 
a  ball  driven  fairly  hits  the  curtain,  whether  it  goes  through  the 
goal  or  not,  it  shall  be  called  a  goal. 

11.  Ball.— The  ball   used   in  playing  shall  be  a  regular  lawn 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  59 

tennis  ball.    A  new  ball  shall  be  put  into  use  for  every  match 
game. 

12.  The  goals  shall  be  made  of  wood,  of  two  uprights  and 
one  cross  piece,  nothing  to  be  used  to  hold  them  together  at  the 
bottom.  The  size,  inside  measure,  shall  be  three  feet  six  inches 
by  three  feet  six  inches.  The  inside  of  the  goals  shall  have  a 
curtain  of  very  light  weight  material  supported  from  the  cross 
piece  only,  or  of  iron  pipe  and  netting  in  the  shape  of  a  cage  of 
same  dimensions  as  the  foregoing  goal.  These  rules  are  not 
absolute,  but  are  subject  to  change  and  modification  upon  the 
mutual  agreement  of  the  contracting  teams. 


<oO  to  150  feet    long 


Lined  up.  In  action. 


Position   and   name   of   each   player   both   "lined   up"  and   "in 
action." 


60  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Charley  Horse  Polo 

Same  rules  as  in  Hand  Polo  except  that  regular  hockeys  are 
used.  Shouldering  and  bucking  are  not  allowed.  Shin  guards 
should  be  worn. 

Bar  Bell  Polo 

(W.  H.  Kinnicutt,  Physical  Director  Cleveland  Y.  M.  C.  A.) 

This  game  can  be  played  by  any  number  of  players  equalfy 
divided  into  two  teams  or  sides.  A  basket  ball  is  used,  and  an 
ordinary  bar  bell  in  the  hands  of  each  player  is  the  "hocUey." 
The  ball  is  put  in  play  in  any  •Convenient  way,  and  each  side 
endeavors  to  drive  it  into  the  opponents'  goal  (a  parallel  bar 
at  each  end  of  field,  or  jump  standards)  hitting  the  ball  only  by 
thrusting — no  swinging  blows  allowed. 

This  method  of  striking  is  well  adapted  to  the  bar  bell,  and 
there  is  little  danger  of  injury  to  other  players  or  opponents. 

The  usual  rules  of  polo  are  modified  to  meet  the  conditions 
of  the  game. 

Pin  Hockey 

Played  with  hockey  and  tennis  ball.  Each  player  has  two  pins 
to  guard.  They  are  set  two  feet  from  the  wall  at  either  end  of 
the  gymnasium,  and  each  pair  of  pins  should  be  far  enough  from 
the  next  pair  to  allow  the  guardsman  to  move  comfortably  about 
them.  Players  stand  in  front  of  their  pins,  in  beginning  the 
game,  and  the  ball  is  rolled  in  by  the  referee,  to  the  centre.  It 
is  then  anybody's  ball.  The  walls  should  be  as  smooth  as  possi- 
ble as  the  carroming  against  them,  thus  knocking  down  pins,  is 
an  important  feature  of  the  game.  A  board  at  either  end  of  the 
gymnasium,  behind  the  pins,  may  be  used  if  the  wall  is  not 
smooth. 

While  these  games  are  of  the  fastest  and  most  fascinating 
nature,  it  is  questionable  about  the  use  of  them  in  fine  gymnas- 
iums. The  hockey  do  dent  the  floor  somewhat,  pins  are  some- 
times split,  windows  not  properly  barred  are  broken,  and  unless 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 


61 


the  audience  is  in  a  safe  place,  ladies'  hats  are  often  disarranged. 
Scoring. — -.Every   pin  knocked  down   scores  one  point  for  the 
offense,  even  though  a  man  knock  down  his  own  pin. 

Gas  Ball 

A  tennis  ball  bounded  in  the  centre  of  the  floor  by  the  referee 
starts  the  game.  Each  side  endeavors  to  bat  the  ball  into  their 
opponents'  goal  or  basket,  as  in  Basket  Ball.  The  ball  may  be 
batted,  bounded  or  scooped  with  one  hand  only.  The  ball  shall 
not  be  picked  up  or  the  fingers  closed  over  it. 

Fouls. — Same  as  in  Basket  Ball,  with  the  above  amendments. 

Penalties. — Free  throw,  as  in  Basket  Ball. 

I£  possible,  no  boundary  lines  should  be  used.  Carroming 
against  walls  should  be  encouraged  if  facilities  permit. 

Hand  Ball 

Rules  found  in  Official  Handbook  of  the  Athletic  League  of  the 
Young  Men's  Christian  Associations  of  North  America. 

Hand  Tennis 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  III.,  No.  28,  p.  83.) 

Even  surface  about  16  x  40  feet,  divided  into  halves  by  a 
regular  tennis  net  about  two  feet  six  inches  high.  The  required 


limit  lines  are  marked  in  the  usual  way   (indoors  with  chalk). 
About  three  feet  from  the  end  line,  another  line,  the  "toe  line," 


62  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

is  marked.  About  ten  feet  from  the  net  on  both  sides  is  marked 
the  "short  line."  The  players  select  sides  and  take  positions 
behind  the  toe  line.  The  beginner  bounds  the  ball  on  the  floor, 
striking  it  with  either  hand,  as  it  descends  again,  to  direct  it 
over  the  net  to  the  opposite  player.  Failure  to  send  the  ball  over 
the  net,  or  to  land  it  within  the  lines  on  the  other  side  of  the  net, 
results  in  forfeiting  the  ball  to  the  opposite  side.  Should  the  op- 
posite side,  however,  fail  to  return  a  properly  directed  ball,  or 
drive  it  over  the  lines,  the  first  player  scores  a  point.  Failure  to 
stand  between  end  lines  at  start  of  game,  or,  touching  the  net 
with  any  part  of  the  body,  counts  a  point  for  the  opposite  side. 
In  active  play  the  delivery  can  be  made  from  any  place  within 
lines. 

Indoor  Base  Ball 

Rules  published  annually  in  Spalding's  Athletic  Library,  Amer- 
ican Sports  Publishing  Company. 

Ling  Ball 

(Physical  Education,  Vol.  IV.,  No.  7,  p.  91.) 

The  number  that  can  play  this  is  limited  only  by  floor  space. 

Two  lines  parallel  to  each  other  are  drawn  upon  the  floor 
about  25  feet  apart.  An  indoor  base  ball  and  bat  should  be  used. 
The  batter  stands  just  behind  one  line,  near  its  end,  and  behind 
this  same  line  all  the  men  that  are  to  bat  should  stand,  while 
the  other  team  should  be  stationed  about  so  as  to  catch  the  fly 
or  pick  up  the  grounders.  The  pitcher  should  stand  on  the  line 
about  two  yards  from  the  batter,  and  throw  up  the  ball  which  the 
batter  strikes.  If  the  batter  thinks  that  he  cannot  reach  the  op- 
ponents' side  before  being  struck  with  the  ball,  he  may  go  to 
one  side,  still  keeping  behind  his  own  line,  and  wait  for  a  chance 
to  reach  there.  If  he  succeeds  in  getting  there  and  back  without 
being  struck,  it  is  a  run. 

Any  number  of  men  that  have  batted  may  be  behind  the  lines 
at  once,  as  long  as  there  is  a  man  home  to  take  the  bat  in  his 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  63 

turn.  There  are  no  fouls.  A  man  must  be  given  a  fair  chance 
to  strike  the  ball.  Three  strikes  are  out.  Three  out,  all  out.  If 
a  man  is  not  home  to  take  his  turn  at  the  bat,  it  puts  that  man 
out. 

Lang  Ball 

(Physical  Education,  Vol.  IV.,  No.  7,  p.  91.) 

The  ball  used  may  be  either  a  basket  ball  or  light  medicine 
ball.  The  rules  for  ordinary  base  ball  will  hold  in  this  game, 
with  the  exceptions  which  will  be  mentioned. 

Any  number  may  play  the  game.  One  side  may  play  another 
or  the  players  may  rotate,  as  in  base  ball.  A  high  bar  is  needed 
by  which  the  batter  can  support  himself  by  the  hands.  The  ball 
must  be  struck  with  the  bottom  of  one  or  both  feet.  A  ball  pass- 
ing in  front  of  a  perpendicular  drawn  from  the  end  of  the  bar 
is  a  fair  ball;  A  ball  struck  by  any  other  part  of  the  body,  or 
passing  behind  the  aforesaid  perpendicular,  after  being  struck, 
is  a  foul.  Three  fouls  are  out.  If  the  batter  misses  the  ball  en- 
tirely it  is  a  strike.  One  strike  is  out,  if  caught  on  the  fly.  A 
fly  caught  is  out  under  any  circumstances.  Convenient  places  on 
the  floor  may  be  chosen  as  bases.  If  a  light  ball  is  used,  the 
runner  may  be  struck  with  it  between  bases  and  thus  be  put  out. 

Square    Ball 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  I.,  No.  9,  p.  n.) 

An  open  square  (usually  the  whole  gymnasium)  and  a  rubber 
or  hand  ball,  or  bean  bag  or  basket  ball  are  necessary  for  this 
game.  Four  to  eight  players  stand  one  at  each  of  the  corners 
(if  eight,  place  one  between  any  two  corners)  as  outposts,  and  a 
like  number  in  the  centre  of  the  square.  The  outposts  toss  the 
ball  from  post  to  post,  the  inner  players  avoiding  proximity  to 
the  posts  at  which  the  ball  may  be  held  for  the  moment,  the  duty 
of  the  outposts  being  to  throw  the  ball  at  the  centre  players, 
when  opportunity  offers  for  a  sure  strike.  Upon  striking  a 
player  who  may  avoid  the  ball  in  any  way  he  can  without  leaving 


64  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

the  square,  the  outposts  quickly  flee,  the  player  who  was  hit  as 
quickly  as  possible  securing  the  ball  and  commanding  all  to 
stand.  He  then  endeavors  to  strike  the  nearest  outpost.  All 
misses  of  the  respective  sides,  centres  and  corners,  may  be  scored 
with  chalk  marks  at  the  respective  places,  three  marks  sufficing 
to  oust  a  player.  The  party  first  out  loses  the  game. 

The  game  may  also  be  played  in  such  a  manner  that  all  out- 
posts hit  must  enter  the  square,  the  last  outpost,  upon  being  hit, 
entering  the  square  for  a  new  game. 

Indoor  Cricket 

Stand  one  Indian  club  at  each  end  of  the  gymnasium.  Make 
a  spot  with  chalk  one  foot  in  front  of  each  club,  as  "touch." 
Six  on  a  team  is  a  good  number.  The  batters  (both  from  the 


0 

O 

3 

3 

0    ' 

x    b 

2     0    x 

• 

1 

O 

O 

0 
2 

3 

3 

(X)  Touch  club.    (.)  Wicket.     (1)  Batters      (2)  Bowlers.     (3)  Fielders. 

same  team)  take  their  positions  at  either  end  of  the  gymnasium, 
with  another  Indian  club  apiece,  placing  one  end  in  "touch." 

The  duty  of  the  bowlers  is  to  knock  down  the  club  at  the  other 
end  of  the  gymnasium  with  an  ordinary  basket  ball,  an  old  one 
preferred.  He  must  stand  behind  "touch"  in  bowling.  The  batter 


Indoor  ana  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  65 

defends  his  "wicket"  with  the  club  in  his  hand.  If  opportunity 
is  offered,  on  striking  the  ball,  he  exchanges  places  with  his 
mate  at  the  other  wicket,  scoring  one  run.  If  either  of  the 
wickets  are  knocked  down  while  either  of  the  runners  are  out 
of  touch,  it  puts  the  runner  out  who  is  nearest  that  wicket  and 
the  next  in  order  takes  his  place  at  bat.  When  all  that  side  has 
batted  and  been  put  out,  the  other  side  comes  to  bat.  A  wicket 
knocked  down  puts  a  man  out,  also  a  fly  caught,  a  foul  caught 
or  a  runner  struck  with  a  batted  ball,  or  touched  out. 

Goal  Throwing  Game 

Divide  players  equally  in  two  lines,  back  to  back,  one  end 
of  the  line  near  the  basket.  Place  a  ball  each  in  the  hands  of 
the  two  players  farthest  from  the  basket.  At  the  word  "Go"  the 
balls  are  passed  quickly  up  the  lines  (passing  to  every  man)  until 
the  head  player  receives  it.  He  immediately  throws  a  goal.  If 
he  fails  he  continues  to  shoot  until  he  succeeds.  (A  fair  man 
stationed  underneath  with  a  wand  can  keep  the  basket  clear  of 
thrown  balls.)  He  then  runs  to  the  last  man  in  line  and  passes 
the  ball  up  in  the  same  manner  as  in  starting  the  game,  to  the 
head  player  wh$  continues  the  game.  The  line  which  finishes 
first  (every  man  having  thrown  a  goal)  and  the  ball  returned  to 
the  foot  of  the  line,  wins  the  game. 

The  lines  may  be  strung  the  length  of  the  gymnasium,  one  line 
throwing  in  one  basket  and  one  in  the  other. 

OTHER  GAMES  AND  ATHLETIC  SPORTS 

Baste  the  Bear 

(Games  and  Sports  for  Boys,  Geo.  Routledge  &  Sons.) 

The  players  should  toss  up  for  the  first  bear  who  kneels  on 
the  ground  within  a  circle  marked  out  for  that  purpose;  each 
bear  may  select  his  own  master  whose  office  it  is  to  hold  him  by  a 
rope  and  use  his  utmost  efforts  to  touch  one  of  the  other  players, 
as  they  try  to  thrash  the  bear  with  their  handkerchiefs  knotted 


66  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

and  twisted  very  tightly.  If  the  bear's  master  can  touch  one 
of  the  assailants  without  dragging  the  bear  out  of  the  ring  or 
letting  go  the  rope,  the  boy  touched  becomes  bear,  selects  his 
keeper  as  before  mentioned,  and  the  sport  continues. 

Walk,    Moon,  Walk. 

(Games  and  Sports  for  Boys,  Geo.  Routledge  &  Sons.) 

All  tie  large  knots  in  one  corner  of  their  pocket  handkerchiefs 
and  then  toss  up  to  see  who  shall  be  "Moon" ;  the  loser  is 
"Moon,"  and  he  must  be  blindfolded.  "Moon"  now  stands  with 
his  legs  stretched  apart,  while  his  playmates  go  behind  him  in 
succession,  and  thrust  their  handkerchiefs  between  his  legs  as  far 
as  they  can  and  in  whatever  direction  they  wish.  When  all  have 
done  this,  one  of  them  cries  "Walk,  Moon,  Walk!"  which  is  a 
signal  for  the  blindfolded  player  to  walk  forward  until  he  treads 
upon  one  of  the  handkerchiefs,  when,  in  an  instant  the  other 
players  pick  up  their  knotted  handkerchiefs  with  which  they 
belabor  the  unlucky  owner  of  the  one  trodden  on,  as  he  runs  to 
a  distant  base  and  back,  after  which  he  becomes  "Moon"  and 
the  game  continues  as  before. 

* 

Sling  the  Monkey 

(Games  and  Sports  for  Boys,  Geo.  Routledge  &  Sons.) 

One  of  the  players  called  the  "Monkey"  has  the  end  of  the 
rope  tied  around  his  middle  in  such  a  manner  that  his  feet  only 
just  touch  the  ground ;  in  his  right  hand  he  holds  a  piece  of 
chalk.  (The  horizontal  bar  may  be  used  to  be  suspended  from.) 
The  other  players  wait  for  a  signal  from  the  Monkey,  and  then 
commence  drubbing  him  with  their  knotted  handkerchiefs ;  the 
poor  Monkey  slung  to  the  bar  cannot  defend  himself,  but  if  he 
can  succeed  in  marking  one  of  the  players  with  the  chalk,  he  is 
immediately  released,  and  he  that  is  chalked  has  to  take  his  place. 
This  is  a  famous  game  among  sailors  and  affords  considerable 
amusement  to  spectators  as  well  as  to  the  players  themselves. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  67 

Test  Mettle 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  II.,  No.  22,  p.  200.) 

Any  number  of  pupils  formed  in  two  equal  divisions  on  the 
opposite  ends  of  the  field  can  participate  in  this  game  requiring 
strength,  skill  and  courage.  A  player  called  upon  by  his  com- 
rades advances  to  meet  an  adversary  from  the  opposite  field,  who 
holds  out  his  outstretched  arm  as  a  counter-challenge  to  hit 
him  upon  it.  The  challenge  accepted  (by  striking  with  the  open 
palm)  the  first  player  must  either  seek  to  return  to  his  line  by 
running  or  overpower  his  opponent  by  holding  him  to  the  ground. 
If  he  does  not  succeed  in  this,  another  from  his  side  may  advance 
to  help  him,  another  from  the  opposite  side  engaging  in  the  fray 
and  so  on.  No  more  than  four  pairs  should  be  engaged  at  one 
time,  in  order  to  avoid  confusion.  Each  time  a  prisoner  is  se- 
cured (overcome)  the  command  "Halt"  is  heeded  by  both  sides, 
the  players  returning  to  their  respective  goals.  In  all  other  re- 
spects the  game  is  conducted  the  same,  as  Prisoner's  Base  with  the 
exception  that  all  players  running  to  the  wrong  (the  enemy's) 
side,  are  regarded  as  deserters,  who  can  be  rescued  as  prisoners, 
or  re-enter  the  play  on  their  former  side. 


ATHLETIC  FEATS 

(Sports  and  Pastimes  of  American  Boys.) 

The  Palm  Spring 

Performed  by  standing  at  a  little  distance  from  a  wall  with 
your  face  toward  it  and  leaning  forward  until  you  are  able  to 
place  the  palm  of  your  hand  quite  flat  on  the  wall ;  you  must 
then  take  a  spring  from  the  hand  and  recover  your  upright  posi- 
tion without  moving  either  of  your  feet.  It  is  better  to  practice 
it  first  with  the  feet  at  a  little  distance  only  from  the  wall,  ia- 
creasing  the  space  as  you  gradually  attain  greater  proficiency  in 
the  exercise 


68  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Trial  of  the  Thumb 

Place  the  inside  of  the  thumb  against  a  wall  or  the  edge  of  a 
table,  being  careful  that  neither  of  the  fingers  nor  the  palm  of  the 
hand  touch  it ;  next  move  your  feet  as  far  back  as  you  possibly 
can,  and  then  take  a  spring  from  the  thumb  and  recover  your 
standing  position  without  shifting  your  feet  forward.  It  greatly 
facilitates  the  spring  if  you  rock  yourself  to  and  fro  three  or 
four  times  before  you  take  it ;  and  it  is  best  to  begin,  as  in  the 
"palm  spring,"  with  the  feet  at  a  little  distance  from  the  table, 
increasing  the  "trial"  of  the  thumb  by  degrees. 

The    Finger  Feat 

Place  your  hands  horizontally  across  and  close  to  your  breast 
and  put  the  tips  of  your  forefingers  together;  another  player 
should  then  endeavor  to  separate  them  by  pulling  at  each  arm ; 
but  if  you  hold  them  firmly  in  the  manner  described,  he  will  be 
unable  to  achieve  it,  although  he  may  be  much  bigger  and 
stronger  than  you.  It  is  not  proper  for  the  second  player  to  use 
sudden  or  violent  jerks  in  his  attempts;  he  must  employ  only  a 
steady,  regular  pull. 

Prostrate  and  Perpendicular 

Cross  your  arms  on  your  body,  lie  down  on  your  back 
and  then  get  up  again  without  using  either  your  elbows  or  hands 
in  doing  so. 

Knuckle  Down 

Consists  in  placing  the  toes  against  a  line  chalked  on  the  floor, 
kneeling  down  and  getting  up  again  without  using  the  hands  or 
moving  the  feet  from  the  line. 

The  Tantalus  Tricks 

Desire  a  player  to  stand  with  his  back  close  to  the  wall,  then 
place  a  piece  of  money  on  the  floor  at  a  little  distance  in  front 
of  him  and  tell  him  he  shall  have  it  if  he  can  pick  it  up  without 
moving  his  heels  from  the  wall.  It  will  be  found  impossible, 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Garnet  69 

as,  in  bending,  a  part  of  the  body  must  necessarily  go  back  be 
yond  the  heels. 

Place  the  left  foot  and  leg  and  the  left  cheek  close  against  a 
wall ;  then  lift  the  right  foot  slowly  and  endeavor  to  touch  the 
left  knee  with  it  and  stand  steadily  in  that  position. 

The  Triumph 

Put  your  arms  behind  you  and  place  the  palms  of  your  hands 
together,  the  fingers  downward  and  the  thumbs  next  your  back; 
then  turn  your  hands  keeping  the  tops  of  'the  fingers  close  to  your 
back  and  the  palms  still  together,  until  the  ends  of  the  fingers  are 
between  your  shoulders,  pointing  upward  toward  your  head  and 
the  thumbs  outside. 

Dot  and  Carry  Two 

This  is  to  be  performed  by  three  players,  whom  we  will  style 
A,  B,  and  C,  in  the  following  manner:  A,  standing  between  B 
and  C,  must  stoop  down  and  pass  his  right  hand  behind  the  left 
thigh  of  B  and  grasp  B's  right  hand ;  he  should  next  pass  his 
left  hand  behind  the  right  thigh  of  C  and  take  hold  ot  C's  left 
hand ;  B  and  C  should  each  pass  one  arm  around  the  neck  of 
A,  and  the  latter,  by  raising  himself  gradually,  will  be  able  to  lift 
the  others  from  the  ground. 

Foot-Throw 

Put  a  basket  ball  between  your  feet  in  such  a  manner  that  it  is 
held  between  your  ankles  and  the  inner  side  of  the  feet ;  then 
kick  up  backward  with  both  your  feet  and  in  this  manner  try 
to  jerk  the  ball  over  your  head,  catching  it  when  it  comes 
down. 

Breast  to  Mouth 

Measure  the  length  of  your  arm  from  the  outside  of  the  elbow 
to  the  tip  of  the  middle  finger  and  mark  it  down  on  a  stick ;  then 
hold  the  stick  horizontally  before  you,  with  your  elbow  close  to 


7O  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

your  side,  placing  the  middle  finger  exactly  over  the  mark,  and 
keeping  the  fingers  at  right  angles  with  the  stick,  and  the  thumb 
closed  over  them.  You  must  now  try  to  raise  the  left  end  of  the 
stick  from  the  horizontal  up  to  your  mouth,  which  should  he 
done  without  changing  the  place  of  your  fingers,  bending  your 
head,  or  moving  your  elbow  from  your  side. 

Jumping  Through  Fingers 

Hold  a  stick  of  wood  between  the  forefingers  of  each  hand, 
and,  without  letting  go,  try  to  jump  over  it  both  forward  and 
backward.  You  may  also  jump  over  your  middle  fingers  placed 
together  without  touching  or  separating  them  with  your  feet. 

Catch  Penny 

Place  on  your  elbow  three  or  four  penny  pieces  in  a  heap,  then 
drop  your  elbow  very  suddenly  so  as  to  bring  your  hand  rather 
below  the  place  where  your  elbow  was  and  try  to  catch  the  money 
before  it  falls  to  the  ground.  A  few  trials  will  enable  you  to 
perform  this  trick  with  the  greatest  facility. 

The  Turn  Over 

Take  a  short  run,  place  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  against  a  wall 
and  throw  the  left  leg  over  it,  making  a  complete  turn  at  the  same 
time  so  that  when  your  foot  touches  the  ground  your  back  is  to 
the  wall.  The  right  foot  is  the  pivot  on  which  you  turn  and  yod 
must  tafce  especial  care  to  keep  it  quite  close  to  the  wall  while 
you  perform  the  Turn  Over. 

The  Long  Reach 

Chalk  a  line  on  the  floor  and  then  place  the  toes  of  both  feet 
on  it,  being  careful  that  they  do  not  pass  beyond ;  then  throw 
forward  either  the  right  or  left  hand,  no  matter  which,  so  far 
and  no  farther  than  you  can  easily  spring  back  from  and  readily 
regain  your  upright  position,  without  either  moving  your  feet 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  71 

from  the  line,  touching  the  floor  with  the  hands  in  throwing  them 
forward,  or  scraping  the  floor  with  them  in  the  spring  back. 
When  you  have  in  this  manner  ascertained  the  utmost  distance 
to  which  you  can  stretch  and  from  which  you  can  recover,  with- 
out scraping  the  hands  or  altering  the  position  of  the  feet,  you 
must  stretch  as  far  forward  as  you  possibly  can  end,  while  sup- 
porting the  body  with  one  hand,  chalk  a  line  on  the  floor  with 
the  other.  You  may,  in  order  to  bring  your  body  lower,  move 
your  feet  backward  from  the  line  marked  on  the  floor  and  by 
so  doing  you  will  be  enabled  to  make  a  much  greater  stretch  than 
you  could  otherwise  have  done.  If  you  can  manage  to  chalk  two 
lines,  your  own  length  apart,  it  is  a  tolerably  good  stretch,  but 
with  a  little  practice  you  may  chalk  considerably  further  than 
that  measure. 

Some  persons,  in  performing  this  feat,  rest  upon  their  elbows 
instead  of  their  hands. 

The  Stooping  Stretch 

Chalk  a  line  on  the  floor  and  place  the  outer  edge  of  the  right 
foot  on  it,  and  at  a  little  distance  behind  the  right  foot  place 
the  left  heel  on  the  line.  Then  take  a  piece  of  chalk  in  your  right 
hand,  bend  down  and  pass  the  right  hand  between  your  legs  and 
under  the  right  knee,  and  chalk  a  line  on  the  floor  as  far  from  the 
former  line  as  you  can  reach,  but  not  so  far  but  that  you  can 
easily  recover  yourself  without  touching  the  ground  with  your 
hands  or  removing  your  feet  from  the  line.  Your  knee  and 
body  may  project  beyond  the  chalked  line,  provided  you  keep 
your  feet  properly  placed. 

There  are  a  number  of  feats  to  be  performed  with  chairs  but 
which  do  not  seem  practicable  for  the  gymnasium. 

Out   Hopping  Game 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  II.,  No.  17,  p.  99.) 

Five  players  stand  within  a  circle  formed  by  from  twenty  to 
thirty  boys.  Four  players  attempt,  by  hopping  on  either  the 


72  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

right  or  the  left  foot,  to  oust  the  remaining  player  from  the 
circle,  who  seeks  to  avoid  all  thrusts  and  attacks  by  running  and 
dodging.  Upon  being  "hopped  out"  the  next  five  players  in  order 
enter  the  circle,  and  so  on,  until  all  players  in  turn  have  been  in 
the  ring.  The  hoppers  must  at  all  times  keep  their  arms  folded 
over  their  chests,  and  never  use  their  hands,  simply  pushing  witb 
their  shoulders. 

Foot  in  the  Ring 

Two  players,  one  of  which  takes  a  lunging  position  forward  left 
or  right,  the  forward  foot  placed  in  a  chalk  ring  six  feet  in  diam- 
eter, the  other  player  begins  his  manoeuvres  hopping  on  one  foot, 
also  with  arms  folded,  and  attempts  by  adroit  attacks  (feinting 
and  pushing)  to  displace  the  other  player.  The  other  player 
must  defend  himself  as  best  he  can.  The  party  in  the  ring  loses, 
when  displaced ;  the  other  player  upon  moving  one  of  his  feet. 

Rooster  Fight 

Similar  to  Foot-in-the-Ring,  excepting  that  both  hop,  each 
trying  to  displace  the  other  by  shouldering.  Each  player  stoops 
and  grasps  his  own  ankles ;  then  shoulders  opponent  as  before. 
The  first  to  remove  hands  from  ankles  or  be  bowled  over  is 
beaten. 

Hand  Wrestling 

Two  players  face  each  other,  feet  planted  firmly,  full  stride 
position  left,  right  hands  grasped.  Each  tries  to  displace  thf 
other.  One  foot  moved  displaces  a  player. 

Tug- of- War  for  Two 

Same  position  as  in  Hand  Wrestling ;  hands  grasping  a  strap 
or  handle.  Upon  the  word  "Pull,"  try  steadily  to  pull  each  other 
toward  the  designated  goal. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  73 

Pole  Tug 

The  game  may  be  varied  with  the  use  of  wands  or  poles,  push- 
ing or  pulling.  In  pulling  with  pole,  they  stand  with  backs  to 
each  other  and  pull  away  from  the  centre. 

French  or  Indian  Wrestle 

Two  players  lie  on  backs,  side  by  side,  locking  arms,  heads  in 
opposite  direction.  Count  "one,  two,  three;!'  at  each  count  the 
adjoining  legs  are  brought  to  perpendicular.  At  count  three, 
catch  at  the  knee  and  endeavor  to  make  the  opponent  perform 
a  back  roll. 

Sitting  Toe  Wrestle 

Two  players  sit  on  mat  facing  each  other,  knees  bent  perpen- 
dicularly with  toes  touching  opponent's.  Pass  stick  under  knees 
and  clasp  hands  (not  opponent's)  in  front  of  knees.  At  word 
"go"  attempt  to  get  your  toes  under  opponent's  toes  and  upset 
him. 

Standing  Toe  Wrestle 

(Y.  M.  C.  A.  Young  Men's  Era,  1892,  page  1592.) 
The  arms  are  folded  and,  hopping  on  one  foot,  each  wrestler 
tries  to  make  his  opponent  put  his  other  foot  upon  the  floor,  by  a 
side  movement  of  the  leg. 

Dog  Fight 

(Y.  M.  C.  A.  Young  Men's  Era,  1893,  page  341.) 
Two  players  place  themselves  on  their  hands  and  knees,  facing 
each  other,  about  three  feet  apart.  Place  an  endless  strap  or 
anything  that  will  not  cut  into  the  flesh  over  the  heads  (which 
must  be  kept  up  and  back)  onto  the  necks.  At  the  word  "Go" 
the  players  pull  against  each  other  until  one  of  them  is  pulled  off 
the  mat,  or  his  head  pulled  forward,  thereby  releasing  the  strap, 
thus  showing  the  other  to  be  the  victor. 


74  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

Skin  the  Snake 

(For  any  number.) 

Players  stand  in  line  at  "front  dress."  Each  player  stoops 
over,  putting  his  right  hand  between  his  legs  and  grasping  the 
left  hand  of  the  player  behind  him.  At  a  given  signal,  the  last 
man  in  line  lies  down  on  his  back,  putting  his  feet  first  between 
the  legs  of  the  player  in  front  of  him.  The  line  walks  backward 
striding  the  bodies  of  those  behind,  and  immediately  lying  down 
upon  having  no  more  to  stride.  Upon  completing  the  trans- 
formation, all  are  lying  on  their  backs.  Then  the  last  man  who 
laid  down  rises  to  his  feet  and  strides  forward  up  the  line,  the 
rest  following  as  fast  as  their  turn  comes.  During  all  these 
manoeuvres  the  grasp  of  the  hands  has  not  been  broken.  Upon 
performing  rapidly,  this  presents  a  peculiar  spectacle,  yet  is 
very  simple. 

Bean  Bag  Games 

(Oat  Bags  and  Passing  Games,  by  R.  A.  Clark,  M.  D.) 
The  writer  has  been  asked  to  put  into  shape  some  bag  games 
which  have  proved  useful  in  his  work.  The  value  of  the  medi- 
cine ball  is  generally  conceded,  but  its  usefulness  for  class  work 
is  limited,  from  the  fact  that  several  are  needed  and  they  cost 
from  $4.50  to  $10.00  apiece,  net.  In  looking  for  a  less  expensive 
substitute  for  the  medicine  ball,  the  writer  began  to  experiment 
along  the  line  of  "bean-bags."  The  beans  soon  became  oats, 
but  the  bags  were  so  useful  that  they  ought  to  be  generally 
known.  They  are  made  as  follows :  Cut  a  circular  piece  of 
pasteboard  on  a  radius  of  7^4  inches  to  serve  for  a  pattern  to  the 
tent  maker.  He  will  cut  out  two  circles  of  heavy  (10-02.)  duck 
for  each  bag  and  sew  them  together  with  heavy  thread  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  from  the  edge,  leaving  an  opening  of  about  three 
inches.  Turn  it  inside  out,  sew  around  again,  close  to  the  edge, 
put  in  four  pounds  of  oats  (have  the  oats  right  there,  if  possible) 
and  sew  up  the  opening  strongly.  There  are  32  pounds  of  oats 
to  the  bushel,  and  oats  for  20  bags  will  cost  one  dollar.  The 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  75 

cost  of  making  twenty  bags,  including  canvas,  will  be,  at  most, 
$3.00,  making  the  total  cost  of  twenty  bags  $4.00,  or  less  than  the 
price  of  one  medicine  ball.  The  bags  are  durable,  costing  nothing 
for  repairs,  and  can  be  used  in  numerous  ways  with  either  large 
or  small  classes.  Be  sure  to  have  half  the  bags  made  of  plain 
duck  and  half  of  striped,  so  that  in  team  work  there  shall  be  no 
confusion.  A  number  of  games  are  described  herewith,  be- 
ginning with  the  least  active. 

Mat  Tossing 

Place  two  mats  as  far  apart  as  the  bags  can  be  tossed.  Choose 
sides  and  toss  as  in  quoits,  one  side  using  white  bags,  the  other 
striped.  A  bag  does  not  score  unless  completely  on  the  mat, 
i.  e.,  not  touching  floor  at  all.  There  should  be  one  bag  for  each 
man.  To  increase  difficulty  stipulate  that  bags  must  be  thrown 
over  a  rope  or  stick  supported  on  top  of  jumping  standards; 
which  are  placed  midway  between  mats.  A  bag  striking  the  stick 
or  passing  underneath  does  net  count. 

Circle  Piling 

(Adapted  to  classes  of  12  to  30.) 

Divide  class  into  two  equal  teams.  Form  each  team  into  a 
circle  of  such  size  that  men  can  just  touch  finger  tips  and  draw  a 
large  circle  in  front  of  toes.  Stack  up  half  the  bags  in  each  circle 
in  front  of  No.  i.  At  the  signal  they  are  passed  around  (one  at 
a  time)  as  rapidly  as  possible,  till  they  reach  No.  8  (or  the  man 
at  right  of  No.  i),  who  stacks  them  up  unaided.  The  more  bags 
the  better.  The  completed  stack  must  stand  alone  and  only  one 
bag  must  touch  the  floor.  The  side  that  stacks  first  wins  that 
round.  In  the  next  round  No.  8  starts  the  bags  and  No.  ^  piles 
up,  etc.,  until  everybody  has  had  a  turn  at  stacking. 

Quick  Passing  in  a  Circle 

(Classes  of  3  to  30.) 

This  is  not  competitive.  Place  men  at  easy  reaching  distance 
in  one  or  two  circles.  Start  two  or  three  bags  around,  passing 


76  Indovr  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

as  rapidly  as  possible.  Work  for  speed.  As  skill  increases  add 
one  bag  and  another  until  the  number  of  bags  approximates  the 
number  of  men  in  circle.  There  is  more  work  in  this  than 
would  appear. 

Competitive  Relay  Race 

(Six   men   and   upward.) 

Divide  class  in  two  teams.  Place  half  of  each  team  at  one 
end  of  the  floor  (on  a  line)  and  half  at  the  other  end.  The  bag 
is  carried  across  the  room  once  by  each  member  of  the  team 
and  delivered  to  the  man  at  the  opposite  side.  The  last  man 
carries  it  over  the  opposite  line.  The  team  finishing  first  wins. 
A  man  should  not  cross  his  line  till  the  bag  reaches  him. 

Single   Line  Passing 

(10    to    30    players.) 

Form  two  teams  of  e.  g.  eight  men  as  in  figure,  the  end  man 
standing  a  little  to  one  side.  No.  I  has  a  bag  and  at  the  signal 
runs  toward  No.  8,  throwing  it  as  he  runs.  No.  2  steps  into 
No.  I's  place.  The  bag  passes  from  hand  to  hand,  from  8  to  2 
the  whole  line  moves  up  one  place  and  No.  3  runs  down,  etc. 

1 


After  No.  8,  in  his  turn,  has  run  down  with  the  bag,  every  man 
will  have  run  and  all  will  be  in  original  position,  and  when  No. 
i  receives  the  bag  again,  that  game  is  done.  The  team  which 
first  gets  the  bag  around  to  No.  I  in  his  own  position  wins. 
Until  the  game  is  well  learned,  the  end  men  should  always  be 
behind  their  line  when  the  bag  is  received.  The  bag  should  be 
held  up  at  arm's  length  as  a  signal  that  the  game  is  done. 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 


77 


Double  Line  Passing 

This  is  the  best  game,  as  from  8  to  40  players  c<m  be  kept 
busy  and  interested.  Divide  the  class  into  two  squads,  which 
are  placed  facing  each  other  on  two  parallel  lines  (chalk)  as 
far  apart  as  the  size  of  the  room  will  admit.  The  greater  the 
distance,  the  better,  but  the  lines  should  be  at  least  six  feet 
from  the  wall.  If  the  teams  are  large  or  contain  an  odd  number 
of  men,  put  one  or  two  more  men  at  the  further  end  than  at  the 
starting  point.  Figure  3  represents  one  team  of  nine  men. 
Another  similar  team  makes  competition.  No.  I  has  a  bag  and 
at  the  signal  runs,  tossing  the  bag  to  No.  9.  The  bag  passes 
through  the  hands  of  each  man  to  No.  5,  who  makes  a  running 
toss  to  No.  4,  and  the  second  round  will  begin  with  No.  2 


4 

. 

3 

2 

I 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

FIG.  3 


FIG.  4 


running  down.  With  every  succeeding  round  each  man  moves 
one  place  in  the  direction  of  the  arrows.  After  the  fifth  round, 
No.  i  will  be  where  No.  5  was  at  first.  No.  i  will  then  run 
up  with  the  bag  and  finally,  after  nine  rounds,  he  will  be  back 
in  his  original  position,  and  when  the  bag  reaches  him  here,  he 
holds  it  up  in  token  of  a  finish.  The  team  accomplishing  this 
first  wins.  It  will  aid  both  spectators  and  judges  if  No.  I  ties 
a  handkerchief  about  his  arm.  After  the  game  is  learned,  or  if 
the  teams  are  large  enough,  put  two  bags  in  circulation  thus : 
Give  Nos.  i  and  2  each  a  bag  (see  Fig.  3).  The  first  bag  starts 
as  before  and  the  instant  it  starts  up  in  the  hands  of  No.  5  (not 


78  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games 

before)  No.  2  starts  down  with  the  second.  The  game  ends 
when  Nos.  I  and  2  have  received  the  bags  in  their  original  posi- 
tions. Now  the  game  takes  only  half  as  much  time  as  before 
and  every  man  gets  twice  as  much  work  in  the  same  time.  In 
learning  the  game,  the  runner  should  not  cross  his  line  till  the 
bag  is  in  his  hand,  but  after  a  little  practice  No.  5,  for  example, 
may  start  when  the  bag  has  reached  No.  7  (see  Fig.  3),  receive 
it  on  the  run  from  No.  6  and  deliver  it,  while  still  running,  to 
No.  4.  This  running  start  can,  with  practice,  be  reduced  to  a 
nicety,  but  should  be  closely  watched,  not  allowing  the  runner 
to  start  too  soon  and  stand  midway  between  the  lines  waiting 
for  the  bag.  Careless  play  would  soon  appear.  Guard  against  it 
by  scoring  thus :  Give  the  winning  team  2  points  and  score  a 
team  I  for  every  time  a  bag  touches  the  floor,  either  on  'account 
of  a  poor  throw  or  a  bad  catch.  Play  three  or  five  games  and 
add  up  the  points.  (Keep  score  on  the  floor  with  chalk.)  This 
method  of  scoring  puts  a  premium  on  careful  playing,  for  a  team 
that  wins,  but  makes  two  errors,  will  be  no  better  off  than  a 
team  which  plays  slower,  but  without  errors.  There  should  be 
one  umpire  for  each  team  to  count  the  errors,  and  a  scorer  who 
may  also  be  judge  of  finish. 

Instead  of  competition  between  teams,  it  is  always  of  interest 
for  one  team  to  play  against  time  as  taken  with  a  stop  watch. 
Much  enthusiasm  is  aroused  in  reducing  time  to  a  minimum. 
Any  live  physical  director  can  devise  other  uses  for  the  bags, 
but  the  above  games  have  been  thoroughly  tested  and  found 
useful.  Some  of  them  have  been  played  day  after  day  by  per- 
manent teams  with  continued  interest.  They  cannot  be  suc- 
cessfully played  with  medicine  balls,  for  the  balls  cannot  be 
grasped  with  the  hand. 

Stake  Guard 

(Mind  and  Body,  Vol.  2.) 

The  good  old  game  of  "Duck  on  the  Rock"  can  be  splendidly 
adapted  to  indoors  by  the  use  of  these  sacks,  as  follows: 


Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gymnastic  Games  79 

The  players  select  a  "guard"  by  throwing  their  sacks  from 
a  distance  of  about  twenty  feet  to  within  a  square  of  from  8  to 
12  feet,  in  the  centre  of  which  stands  an  Indian  Club.  The 
player  whose  sack  lands  farthest  from  the  club  becomes  guard. 
The  guard  now  places  his  sack  on  the  club,  the  other  players 
meanwhile  retiring  to  the  starting  line.  Upon  a  given  signal, 
all  players  endeavor  to  hit  the  club  or  the  sack  upon  it,  in  order 
either  to  upset  the  club  or  to  throw  the  sack  off,  the  guard  in 
turn  quickly  replacing  club  and  sack  and  then  tagging  any  player 
whom  he  can  reach  within  the  lines  of  his  square.  If  he  suc- 
ceeds in  tagging  a  player,  then  he  must  in  turn  seek  to  escape 
from  the  square  before  the  new  guard  (the  player  who  was 
tagged)  can  place  his  sack  on  the  club.  The  players  who  suc- 
ceed in  getting  their  sacks  without  being  tagged  may  throw  or 
hurl  their  sacks  from  the  starting  line  as  often  as  opportunity 
offers,  the  unsuccessful  players  lingering  near  the  square  to 
await  their  opportunity  for  grasping  sacks.  (It  is  preferable  to 
continue  throwing  the  sacks  simultaneously,  upon  a  given  signal 
after  each  displacement  of  the  sack.)  After  awhile  the  throw- 
ing distance  may  be  increased,  in  order  to  make  the  game  more 
interesting,  it  frequently  occurring  that  the  players  do  not  suc- 
ceed in  displacing  the  guard's  sack,  when  it  behooves  him  to  be 
careful  lest  some  one  enters  his  trust — a  misdirected  run  not  in- 
frequently freeing  all  players  who  stand  around,  watching  an 
opportunity  to  regain  their  sacks.  The  square  can  also  be  made 
smaller  than  stated  above  to  help  the  guard  or  to  secure  better 
olay  or  aim. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


HOME  -EXERCISING-WHAT  TO  USE 

p^  To  the  grown  man  who  has  not  started  young 

X  to  exercise  systematically,  it  is  necessary  when 
the  years  commence  to  tell,  to  go  back  over  lost 
ground  and  try  to  pick  up  the  threads  of  his 
health  and  try  to  brace  up  once  more  the  tired 
frame  that  seems  to  grow  more  weary  with  each 
departing  year.  However,  let  those  whose  youth 
has  departed  without  giving  them  the  opportunity 
to  experience  real  delightful  and  health-giving  exercise,  not  de- 
spair, but  endeavor  by  taking  up  now  rational  exercise  to  regain 
perhaps  a  little  of  that  vigor  which  they  knew  not  so  long  ago 
and  which  they  may  be  able  to  recall.  One  of  the  aims  of 
physical  training  is  to  make  exercise  interesting  and  enjoyable, 
and  in  doing  this  there  is  no  better  method  for  the  ordinary 
man,  especially  the  man  with  a  family,  than  to  make  his  ex- 
ercise a  part  of  the  family  work.  There  is  no  reason  why  he 
should  not  have  the  entire  family  group  all  entering  into  the 
spirit  of  it,  and  in  this  way  the  burden  is  lightened  and  exercis- 
ing becomes  more  enjoyable  and  interesting,  and  incidently 
more  beneficial. 

The  first  article  that  suggests  itself  for  home  exercise  is  a 
satisfactory  style  of  chest-weight  machine,  and  A.  G.  Spaldmg 
8r  Bros.,  in  their  endeavor  to  put  out  goods  that  would  be 
really  suitable  for  home  use,  have  included  in  their  line  a  num- 
ber of  styles  of  chest-weight  machines  which 
are  well  made,  and  which  they  sell  at  prices 
that  are  exceedingly  reasonable.  Their  No.  2 
Chest-Weight  Machine  costs  $5  complete. 
This  price  was  unheard  of  before  the  un- 
equaled  facilities  of  this  concern  made  it 
possible  for  them  to  market  such  a  number  of 
these  machines  that  they  were  able  to  bring 


SFALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

the  price  down  to  this  figure.  The 
machine  is  well  made  and  easy-running. 
The  wall  and  floor  boards  are  of  hard- 
wood, nicely  finished  and  stained.  All 
castings  are  heavily  japanned  and  every 
part  of  the  machine  is  guaranteed  free  of 
defect.  The  weights  are  S-lb.  iron  dumb 
bells,  and  they  can  be  removed  to  use  as 
dumb  bells  if  desired.  An  exceedingly  satisfactory  style  of 
machine  is  the  Spalding  Chest  Weight  No.  12,  at  $10.00  each. 
This  is  a  very  well-made  machine,  indeed.  The  cast-iron  parts 
are  all  nicely  japanned,  the  wheels  are  iron,  turned  true  on  cen- 
ters, and  have  hardened  steel  cone-point  bearings.  The  guide 
rods  are  spring  steel,  copper  plated,  and  the  weight  carriage  has 
removable  felt  bushings,  noiseless  and  durable.  Each  handle  is 
equipped  with  ten  pounds  of  weights.  This  machine  is  an  ex- 
ceedingly satisfactory  style.  Something  that  is  very  useful  as  an 
attachment  to  the  chest-weight  machine  is  the  foot  and  leg  attach- 
ment. Spalding  furnishes  this,  well  made  of  heavy  cowhide, 
readily  attached  to  one  handle  or  both  of  the  machine  and  to  be 
worn  with  or  without  shoe.  The  price  of  this  foot  and  leg  attach- 
ment is  $1.50  each.  Spalding  also  furnishes  a  head  and  neck 
attachment,  to  be  used  with  the  chest-weight  machine,  made  of 
heavy  cowhide,  and  ready  for  use  by  simply  snapping  to  one  of 
the  handles  of  the  machine  or  both.  The  price  of  the  No.  3  head 
and  neck  attachment  is  also  $1.50 
each. 

Exercise  acts  on  the  health  of  an 
individual  in  the  same  way  as  the 
draught  does  on  the  fire  in  a  furnace. 
Pile  on  the  coal  and  shut  off  the 
draught,  and  you  kill  the  fire.  Con- 
tinue to  eat  heavy  meals  and  take  no 
exercise,  and  your  health  will  be 
affected;  but  not  because  of  the  food 
you  have  eaten  so  much  as  on  account 
of  the  lack  of  exercise.  A  little  ex- 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

ercise  is  all  that  is  necessary  to 
keep  one  in  good  condition.  Some 
rational,  pleasant,  and  interesting 
exercise  persisted  in  with  regu- 
larity is  all  that  is  required,  and 
really  there  is  no  exercise  more 
interesting  and  so  well  within  the 
reach  of  the  ordinary  man  in  his 
own  home  as  that  which  can  be  obtained  from  a  satisfactory  style 
of  rowing  machine.  Spalding  furnishes  two  different  styles  of 
complete  rowing  machines.  In  the  one  the  means  used  to  pro- 
duce the  resistance  is  a  simple  friction  clutch.  This  style  of 
machine  is  known  as  the  Laflin  Machine.  It  takes  instant  hold 
at  the  commencement  of  the  stroke,  and  retains  the  pressure  till 
its  completion,  when  it  instantly  releases  it,  precisely  as  in  a  boat. 
Each  machine  is  adjustable  to  any  amount  of  friction  or  resist- 
ance. The  Laflin  Machine,  No.  119,  costs  $16.00  each.  The 
other  style  of  rowing  machine  furnished  by  Spalding  is  known  as 
the  Kerns.  This  is  the  ideal  boat  for  home  use  and  training  pur- 
poses. It  is  suitable  alike  for  the  athlete  or  the  ordinary  man  or 
woman.  It  is  used  by  the  leading  athletic  clubs  and  by  prominent 
oarsmen  all  over  the  world,  and  has  been  pronounced  the  most 
perfect  rowing  machine  e/er  produced.  It  is  fitted  with  the  patent 
roller  seat  and  adjustable  shoes,  and  by  turning  a  thumb-nut  the 
belt  can  be  tightened  to  any  desired  figure,  and  thus  more  or  less 
friction  thrown  into  the  running 
parts,  imitating  the  resistance  when 
forcing  a  rowboat  through  the  water. 
This  machine  can  be  used  by  women 
as  well  as  men  simply  by  loosening 
the  thumb-nut  to  reduce  the  resist- 
ance, and,  on  the  other  hand,  by  re- 
versing the  operation  the  resistance 
can  be  so  increased  that  the  strongest 
athlete  can  have  any  amount  of  re- 
sistance. The  oars  are  pivoted  in  such 
a  way  that  the  operator  can  handle 


SPALDINO'8    ATHLETIC    LIBBABT. 

large  body,  and  although  extremely  light,  repre- 
sent a  club  weighing  three  pounds  or  more.  In 
these  clubs  the  prices  are  as  follows: 

No.  A,  ebonite  finish,  per  pair,  $3.50.    No.  AA, 
with  German  silver  bands,  per  pair,  $5.00. 

Iron  dumb  bells  and  nickel-plated  dumb  bells 
are  also  supplied  by  Spalding.  The  iron  dumb 
bells,  black  enamel,  in  sizes  from  2  to  40  Ibs., 
cost  6  cents  per  lb.,  and  in  sizes  over  40  Ibs.  each,  cost  8  cents 
per  lb.  When  required,  bar  bells  made  in  any  weight  and  with 
wrought-iron  handles,  any  length  desired,  will  be  furnished  by 
Spalding  at  10  cents  per  lb.  Nickel-plated  dumb  bells  make  a 
nice  appearance,  and  Spalding  furnishes  them  in  sizes  from  I  to 
5  Ibs.  each.  The  plain  nickel-plated  dumb  bells,  natural  polish, 
cost,  for  the  different  sizes,  as  follows:  No.  iN,  i-lb.  size,  25 
cents  per  pair;  No.  2N,  2-lb.,  50  cents;  No.  3N,  3-lb.,  65  cents; 
No.  4N,  4-lb.,  75  cents;  No.  sN,  5-lb.,  $1.00. 

Nickel-plated  dumb  bells  nicely  polished  and  furnished  with 
rubber  bands,  so  that  when  they  drop  they  do  not  make  a  noise, 
are  furnished  by  Spalding  also,  and  the  prices  are  as  specified 
below : 

No.  iB,  i-lb.  size,  65  cents  per  pair;  No.  2B,  2-lb.,  75  cents; 
No.  36,  3-lb.,  $1.00 ;  No.  4B,  4-lb.,  $1.15;  No.  56,  s-lb.,  $1-25. 
It  is  necessary  to  have  Indian  club  and  dumb  bell  hangers  in 
order  to  keep  the  Indian  clubs  and  dumb  bells  in  proper  shape. 
They  should  not  be  scattered  around  the  room,  but  by  simply  put- 
ting up  a  pair  of  hangers  they  can  be  kept  in  good  condition,  and 
out  of  the  way  when  not  in  use.   Spalding  furnishes  these  hangers, 
made  of  iron  and  nicely  japanned,  at  prices  as  noted. 
No.  3,  for  Indian  clubs,  complete  with  screws 
for  attaching,  16  cents  per  pair. 

No.  4,  for  dumb  bells,  complete  with  screws  for 
attaching,  16  cents  per  pair. 

No.  5,  for  Indian  clubs,  mounted  on  oak  strips, 
25  cents  per  pair. 

No.  6,  for  dumb  bells,  mounted  on  oak  strips, 
25  cents  per  pair. 


WALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBBABY. 

Many  men  do  not  realize  the  importance  of 
exercise  as  a  preventive  of  disease,  and  as  an  aid 
to  the  enjoyment  of  good  health.  It  is  not  so 
important  to  have  large  powerful  muscles,  as  it 
is  to  have  perfect  digestion  ;  it  is  not  so  essential 
to  have  wonderful  agility  as  it  is  to  possess  a 
strong  regular  heart,  and  the  importance  of  having 
good  lungs  and  kidneys  is  something  that  cannot 
be  overestimated.  Natural  functions  of  the  body  are  aided  by 
rational  exercises ;  different  parts  of  the  body  are  kept  in  good 
condition  if  exercise  is  regular.  If  this  was  thoroughly  under- 
stood and  the  importance  of  it  realized  by  all  men,  the  race 
would  be  healthier  and  have  better  chance  of  developing  further, 
and  beyond  what  has  been  achieved  so  far.  It  rests,  however, 
in  the  hands  of  each  individual  to  see  to  it  himself  that  he  uses 
the  health  that  is  his  to  further  develop  his  bodily  strength. 
Exercise  is  a  debt  that  every  man  owes  to  his  constitution,  and 
he  cannot  pay  it  up  too  promptly.  Heredity  gave  to  each  of  us  as 
a  gift  a  certain  quota  of  health.  Posterity  demands  that  you  in* 
crease  that  quota  to  as  great  an  extent  as  possible,  and  even  if  we 
do  not  value  health  for  ourselves,  we  should  have  enough  consid- 
eration for  those  who  are  to  come  after  us  to  leave  them  no 
greater  handicap  in  the  race  of  life  than  we  started  with.  To  do 
this  it  is  not  necessary  for  us  to  become  athletes  or  to  neglect  our 
business  affairs.  Good  health  simply  necessitates  that  we  take  * 
moderate  amount  of  exercise  in  a  rational  way. 

Following  out  the  idea  of  having  other  members  of  the  family 
enter  into  the  matter  of  exercises,  so  that  it  becomes  a  family 
concern,  and  not  merely  a  matter  for  one  individual 
member  of  the  family,  there  is  one  article  of  exercise 
that  lends  itself  naturally  to  exercises  in  the  home — 
that  is  the  Medicine  Ball.  Many  people — in  fact,  a 
great  many — do  not  know  anything  about  exercising 
with  the  medicine  ball.  Some  of  them  have  never 
heard  of  this  article,  or  if  they  have  heard  of  it, 
perhaps  imagine  it  is  something  altogether  different  „  j 
trom  what  it  really  is.  To  all  of  those  we  would 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

recommend  that  they  get  immediately  a  copy  ot 
the  Spalding  'Athletic  Library,  No.  262,  entitled 
"Exercises  with  the  Medicine  Ball."  The  follow- 
ing is  an  extract  from  this  publication: 

"One  of  the  aims  of  physical  training  is  to  make 
exercise  interesting  and  enjoyable.  To  be  bene- 
ficial in  the  highest  sense  it  must  be  recreative.  Particularly  is 
this  true  of  physical  exercise  for  business  men.  As  a  class,  in 
their  daily  work  they  are  kept  on  a  constant  mental  strain. 
Besides,  they  are,  to  a  large  degree,  physically  inactive.  Life 
iecomes  too  intense,  too  serious,  too  sordid.  Exercise,  therefore, 
for  business  men,  must  be  largely  recreative,  relaxing  and  restful." 
This  is  in  the  category  that  we  class  exercises  with  the  medi- 
cine ball.  It  is  particularly  useful  for  the  business  man,  especially 
5n  his  own  home.  Spalding  furnishes  three  different  sizes  of 
medicine  balls,  weighing  from  4  to  9  pounds.  Covering  is  of 
selected  tanned  leather,  sewn  in  the  same  manner  as  a  foot  ball. 
The  quality  throughout  is  first-class.  Particular  care  has  been 
taken  in  making  these  balls  to  be  sure  that  they  would  hold  their 
shape.  The  exercises  with  the  ball  consists  of  throwing  the  ball 
from  one  to  another,  and  the  catching  of  it  develops  the  chest, 
exercises  the  back,  arms,  and  legs,  and,  in  fact,  improves  the 
whole  system.  The  price  of  the  medicine  ball  is — for  the  No.  II, 
4-lb.  ball,  $5.00;  for  the  No.  12,  6-lb.  ball,  $6.00  each,  and  for  the 
No.  13,  g-lb.  ball,  $7.00  each. 

As  an  aid  to  limbering  up  and  making  the  muscles  supple,  the 
wands  and  wooden  bar  bell  should  not  be  neglected.    Spalding 
furnishes  a  very  satisfactory  style  of  calisthenic  wand  in  their  No. 
4,  4^  feet  long  and  I  inch  in  diameter.    The 
cost  of  these  is  very  reasonable,  the  price  being 
$1.60  per  dozen.    They  also  furnish  a  school 
wand,  their   No.  3,  3^   feet  long,  made  of 
straight-grain  maple,  for  $1.30  per  dozen,  and 
in  the  bar  bells  their  best  grade  is  known  as 
the  Model  S.    This  was  specially  designed  by 
Dr.  Watson  L.  Savage,  of   New  York  City. 
Has  large  pear-shaped  ends  with  a  flexible 


SPALDING  S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

,  hickory  shaft  one-half  inch  in  diameter,  pro- 
ducing a  vibratory  exercise  similar  to  that 
1  obtained  with  the  French  wand.  The  price  of 
the  Model  S,  Savage  bar  bells,  is  $6.00  per 
dozen,  and  for  the  ordinary  bar  bells,  Spalding 
No.  2,  made  of  selected  material,  highly  pol- 
ished, and  5  feet  long,  the  price  is  $5.00  per 
dozen. 

An  article  that  is  interesting  as  part  of  the 
exercising  equipment  in  the  home  is  a  suitable 
style  of  striking  bag  platform  or  disk  fitted  with  a  good  durable 
bag.  Spalding  furnishes  a  very,  satisfactory  article  of  this  charac- 
ter in  their  No.  PR  Adjustable  Platform  Disk,  without  bag,  for 
$5.00  each.  They  also  furnish  other  styles  in  their  No.  FR  for 
$5.00,  without  bag,  and  their  No.  CR  for  $7.50,  without  bag. 
Striking  bags  they  furnish  in  prices  from  $1.50  up  to  $8.00  each. 
The  Automatic  Abdominal  Masseur  is  based  upon  the  principle 
of  muscular  contraction  (the  force  which  nature  uses),  and  by  its 
mechanical  arrangement  it  effectually  applies  force  in  the  same 
direction  that  nature  does,  and  will  gradually  discard  the  use  of 
cathartics.  So  promptly  does  the  Automatic  Abdominal  Masseur 
excite  the  muscular  contraction  of  the  intestines  that  only  a  few 
moments'  use  at  the  proper  time  is  necessary  before  its  effects 
will  be  felt.  Its  action  upon  the  liver 
and  stomach  is  equally  as  prompt  and 
effective,  and  derangements  of  these 
organs  are  speedily  remedied.  Obesity 
is  a  condition  that  troubles  a  great 
many  persons,  and  the  Automatic 
Abdominal  Masseur  will  relieve  them 
in  a  prompt  and  agreeable  manner. 
It  is  an  effective  remedy  for  torpidity 
of  the  liver,  dyspepsia  and  pendulous 
abdomen.  It  can  be  used  in  the  home 
by  all  members  of  the  family,  and  it  is 
always  ready  for  use.  It  may  be  con- 
veniently placed  in  the  bath  room.  It 


SPALDING'8    ATHLETIC    LIBBABT. 


occupies  very  small  wall  space  and  is  adjustable  in  height  to  the 
needs  of  any  person  using  it.  Equipped  with  polished  detachable 
gear  cover,  the  Spalding  Automatic  Abdominal  Masseur  costs, 
complete,  $10.00. 

A  complete  gymnasium  for  the  home  is  the  Spalding  Home 
Gymnasium  Board.  Convenient,  it  does  not  take  up  much  room, 
is  always  ready,  and  is 
really  the  most  compact, 
si  mplest  and  best  arrange- 
ment for  providing  a  com- 
plete set  of  home  exer- 
cising apparatus  that  has 
ever  been  devised.  Com- 
prises board  (with  attach- 
mentsforfasteningto  floor 
so  that  walls  need  not  be 
marred),  and  Spalding 
Abdominal  Masseur,  No. 
PR  Spalding  Adjustable 
Striking  Bag  Disk,  No. 
2  Spalding  Chest  Weight 
Machine,  including  pair 
of  5-lb.  Dumb  Bells  and 
No.  14  Spalding  Striking 
Bag.  The  cost,  complete, 
all  attached,  is  $31.50. 
The  board  is  only  fastened 
to  the  floor.  Braces  are 
padded  with  leather  so 
that  walls  will  not  be 
damaged.  It  can  be  put 
up  in  any  room  with  a 
ceiling  8  feet  high. 

It  is  well  for  all  of  those 
who  are  interested  in  ex- 
ercising, who  may  by  any 
chance  need  anything  of 


SPALDING '3    ATHLETIC    LIBRA  BY. 

this  kind,  to  send  for  a  copy  of  the  Spalding  catalogue.  It  should 
be  kept  convenient,  so  that  orders  can  be  sent  in  as  any  article 
of  exercise  may  be  required,  and  the  prices  of  the  Spalding 
apparatus  and  exercising  and  athletic  goods  will  be  found  reason- 
able when  the  quality  of  the  material  and  workmanship  furnished 
is  considered. 

The  addresses  of  the  Spalding  stores,  from  which  copies  of  the 
catalogue  will  be  mailed  on  application,  will  be  found  on  front 
inside  cover  of  this  book. 


OFFICIAL   RULES    FOR    ALL  ATHLETIC   SPORTS. 

The  following:  list  contains  the  Group  and  the  Number  of  the  book  of 
Spalding's  Athletic  Library  in  which  the  rules  wanted  are  contained.  See 
front  pages  of  book  for  complete  list  of  Spalding's  Athletic  Library. 


EVENT. 

a 

a 

No. 

EVENT. 

a 

I 
U 

No. 

All-Round  Athletic  Cham- 

Lawn Bowls  

11 

?,07 

pionship  

12 

182 

Lawn  Games  

11 

188 

A.  A.  U.  Athletic  Rules 

12 

311 

Lawn  Tennis  

\ 

4 

A.  A.  U.  Boxing  Rules 

12 

311 

Obstacle  Races  

1? 

55 

A.  A.  U.  Gymnastic  Rules.  . 
A.  A.  U.  Water  Polo  Rules. 
A.  A.  U.  Wrestling  Rules.  .  . 
Archery  

12 
12 
12 
11 

311 
311 
311 
248 

Olympic  Game  Events  —  Mar- 
athon Race,  Stone  Throw- 
ing with  Impetus,  Spear 

Badminton  

11 

188 

Base  Ball  

1 

1 

12 

•>f> 

Indoor  

9 

9 

12 

55 

Basket  Ball,  Official  

7 

7 

Pin  Ball 

12 

55 

Collegiate  

7 

312 

1 

306 

Women's  

7 

318 

10 

199 

Water  

1? 

55 

12 

55 

Basket  Goal  

6 

188 

Polo   Water  (A  A  U  ) 

12 

311 

Bat  Ball  

1? 

55 

12 

311 

Betting  

1? 

55 

n     e                 i    r>  ••.""•  '    '  "  "  ' 

Bowling  

8 

8 

12 

55 

Boxing—  A.  A.  U.,  Marquis 
of    Queensbury,    London 
Prize  Ring  

1  1 

162 

Public  Schools  Athletic 
League  Athletic  Rules  

12 

313 

Broadsword  (mounted)  
Caledonian  Games  
Canoeing  

12 
12 
1? 

55 
55 
23 

Girls'  Branch;   including 
Rules  for  School  Games. 
Push  Ball  

12 

11 

314 
170 

Children's  Games  

11 

189 
194 

Push  Ball,  Water  
Quoits  

12 
11 

55 
167 

3 

3 

Racquets  

11 

194 

U 

138 

Revolver  Shooting  

12 

55 

11 

14 

Ring  Hockey  

6 

180 

12 

55 

Roller  Polo  

10 

10 

14 

165 

Roller  Skating  Rink  

10 

10 

2 

2 

Roque  

11 

?71 

2 

334 

Rowing  

13 

1?* 

2 

2  A 

Sack  Racing  

I9 

55 

12 

55 

Shuffleboard  

1? 

55 

2 

332 

13 

209 

Golf 

5 

5 

Skittles  

1? 

55 

Golf-Croquet 

6 

188 

Snowshoeing  

1? 

55 

Hand  Ball           

11 

13 

Squash  Racquets  

11 

194 

Hand  Polo 

10 

188 

Swimming  

13 

177 

11 

194 

Tether  Tennis  

11 

188 

Hitch  and  Kick. 

12 

55 

Three-Legged  Race  

I9 

55 

6 

304 

Volley  Ball  

6 

188 

6 

6 

Wall  Scaling  

1? 

55 

Field  

6 

154 

Walking  

T> 

55 

Garden       

6 

188 

Water  Polo  (  American)  

1? 

311 

6 

188 

Water  Polo  (English)  

1' 

55 

Parlor 

6 

188 

Wicket  Polo  

10 

188 

Ring 

12 

55 

Wrestling  

14 

236 

Ontario  Hockey  Ass'n  
indoor  Base  Ball      

6 
9 

256 
9 

Y.  M.  C.  A.  All-Round  Test. 
Y  M  C  A  Athletic  Rules 

12 
12 

302 
302 

Intercollegiate  A.  A.  A.  A.  . 
I.-C.  Gymnastic  Ass'n  
Lacrosse 

12 
15 
11 

307 
333 
201 

Y.  M.  C.  A.  Hand  Ball  Rules. 
Y.M.C.A.  Pentathlon  Rules. 
Y.M.C.A.  Volley  Ball  Rules 

12 
12 
12 

302 
302 
302 

U.  S.  I.-C.  Lacrosse  League 

11 

305 

THE  SPALDING 


^SPALDING 


1L, Wrestling  Full  Tights^ 

TJ=  •*•  •       =<r 

Best  worsted,  knit  to  shape  and  put  together  by  hand,  reinforced  at 
knees  with  strong  silk  finish  worsted.  Stock  colors :  Black,  Navy  Blue 
and  Maroon.  Other  colors  on  special  order.  Sizes:  waist,  28  to  42  inches. 
Larger  sizes  on  special  order.  These  full  tights  are  made  after  the  sug- 
gestions and  ideas  of  the  most  prominent  wrestlers,  including  Gotch, 

Oleson  and  others. 
No.  WA.    Spalding  Wrestling  Pull  Tights.     Per  pair,  96.OO 


.  -O-   -     -O-        -Oi~--- 'O-~-    -'•Of'--- 


Spalding  Special 
Combined  Wrestling  Supporter  and  Belt 


Mercerized  silk  elastic,  strong  and  durable.  The 
only  really  safe  supporter  for  •wrestling  furnished. 
No.  WS.  Spalding  Wrestling  Supporter.  82.  OO 

Spalding  Special  Pads  for  Wrestling 

To  be  sewn  on  wreetling  tight*. 
i  No.  B.      Covered 
with  soft  tanned 
horsehide,  padded 
with  hair  felt. 

Per  pair,  7  80. 
No.  83.  Covered 
with  tan  leather 
and  nicely  padded. 

No.  B  per  pajr(  OOC.       "o».61  and  02 

No.  8 1 .    Covered  with  durable  cloth  and  padded 
wool  felt     ....        Per  pair,  SBc. 


Spalding 
Y.  M.  C.  A.  Trousers 

REGULATION  STYLE 

No.  9.  Men's  Leaders.  Blue  or 
Gray  flannel,  with  stripe  down 
side  of  leg.  Per  pair,  93.  BO 

No.  3.  Flannel,  good  quality. 

Per  pair,  93. OO 

No.  4.  Flannel,  medium  quality. 
Per  pair,  81.78  *  $18.00  Dot. 

Spalding 
Boys'  Knee  Pants 

No.  98. 
Boys'  Lead- 
ers. Blue  flannel  Y.  M.  C.  A. 
Knee  Pants,  with  stripe  down 
side.  .  Per  pair,  S3. BO 
No.  I  4B.  Boys'  Knee  Pants. 
Material  same  quality  as  No. 
4  Y.  M.  C.  A.  trousers,  with 
stripe  down  side.  Per  pair,  •  I  .OO  *  $10.80  Dot 


The  prices  printed  in  italics  opposite  items  marked  with  it  will  be  quoted  only  on  ordertfor  one-half  dozen  01 
more.     Quantity  price*  NOT  allowed  on  itemt  NOT  marked  with  if 


A.  G.  SPALDI NG  ft  BROS. 


ing 


attention. 


New  York 

Boston 
Sjnaut 

Buffalo 


Philadelphia    Washington 

Plttiburg         Atlanta 

Baltimore    New  Orleans 

Montreal  Canada 


Chicago 

Cincinnati 
Cleveland 
Columbia 


St.  LoaU 

KantaiClty 

DenTer 

Detroit 


San  francltco 

Seattle 

MlnneapolU 

St.  Paul 


I'rtat  in  effKtJulv  5.1909.  Subject  (o  {hajigt  without  wrfioe. 


ACCE  TNO  TUCCPAI  DIME 

SUBSTITUTE  '  "t  orALUINb 


iTRADE-MARKGr,N,TTEvES 


THE  SPALDING  STRIKING  BAGS 

THE  BLADDERS  USED  IN  ALL  OCR  STRIKING  BAGS  ARE  MADE  OF  PURE  PARA  RUBBER 
(NO  COMPOSITION)  AND  FULLY  GUARANTEED 

All  our  single  end  bags  except  No.  G  are  made  with  solid  leather  top,  through  center  of  which 

rope  passes,  making  them  the  most  certain  in  action  of  any.    Laces  on  side  at  top,  so  that  the 

bladder  .can  be  inflated  without  interfering  with  rope.     Each  bag  is  most  carefully  inspected 

and  then  packed  complete  in  box  with  bladder,  lace  and  rope. 

No.  C. .  This  is  a  heavy  durable  Gymnasium  Bag  suitable  for  all  around  exercise 
work  and  the  strongest  -bag  made.  The  cover  is  of  heavy  English  grain 
jeather,  same  as  used  in  our  best  grade  foot  balls  and  basket  balls  and  made 
in  the  same  way.  It  wnT  outlast  two  or  three  bags  of  any  other  make.  With 
loop  top.  ............  Each,  88. OO 

No.  I  9.  Made  of  highest  quality  Patna  kid,  the  lightest  and  strongest  of 
leather.  Sewed  with  linen  thread,  double  stitched  and  red  welted  seams. 
Especially  suited  for  exhibition  work,  and  a  very  fast  bag.  Each,  87. OO 

No.  I  9S.  Same  material  as  No.  19,  but  furnished  with  special  light  bladder 
and  weighs  only  7  ounces  complete.  The  fastest  bag  made,  but  very  strong 
and  durable.  .........  Each,  87. OO 

No.  2O.  Made  of  finest  selected  calfskin,  double  stitched,  red  welted  seams 
and  reinforced  throughout  Very  fast  and  a  durable  bag  for  all  around 
use. Each,  87. OO 

No.  18.  The  "Fitzsimmons  Special."  Made  of  finest  selected  olive  Napa 
tanned  leather,  extra  well  made;  double  stitched,  red  welted  seams  and  rein- 
forced throughout  For  training  purposes  particularly  this  bag  will  be  found 
extremely  satisfactory  in  every  respect Each,  85. OO 

-Js'o.  I  8S.  Same  as  No.  18,  but  smaller  in  size  and  lighter.  .  Intended  for  very 
speedy  work.  ..........  Each,  86. OO 

No.  1 2.  Olive  tanned  leather,  specially  selected;  double  stitched,  red  welted 
seams  and  reinforced  throughout  Excellent  for  quick  work.  Each,  84. OO 

No.  I  O.  Specially  tanned  brown  glove  leather;  double  stitched,  red  welted 
seams  and  reinforced  throughout.  Very  well  made.  .  Each,  83.6 O 

No.  I  7.  Made  of  fine  craven  tanned  leather,  well  finished;  double  stitched, 
red  welted  seams  and  reinforced  throughout.  A  good  bag.  Each,  S3.6O 

No.  I  6.  Extra  fine  grain  leather,  full  size  and  lined  throughout       Each,  3.OO 

No.  I  6.  Made  of  olive  tanned  leather,  full  size  and  lined  throughout:  red 
welted  seams. -.  ,  Each,  82. OO 

No.  14.    Good  quality  colored  sheepskin ;  lined  throughout         Each,  I.6O 


No.  19 


SPALDING   STRIKING   BAG    SWIVELS 


No.  8.  The  simplest  and  most  effective  ball 
bearing  swivel  on  the  market  Rope  can  be 
changed  instantly  without  interfering  with 
any  other  part  of  swivel  .  Each,  8I.6O 

No.  9.  With  removable  socket  for  quickly  sus- 
^  pending  or  removing  bag  without  read- 
justing  Each,  6Oc. 


No.  I  I .  Swivel  action,  with  bell  cord  coupling 
and  rope  attached.  Fastens  permanently  to 
disk;  japan  finish.  .  .  Each,  6Oc. 

No.  6.  Japanned  iron  stem  for  use  with  plat- 
form or  disk.  .  .  .  Each,  36 c. 

No.  I  2.  Ball  and  socket  action.  Fastens  perma- 
nently to  disk;  nickel-plated.  9  Each,  26c. 


addreaed  to    A.  V.  5FALDING 

&T*T>/"4C     in  any  of  the  following         ^HJrl 
DRAJ  J»            cities  will  receive  attention^ 

Mew  York 

Boston 
Syracuse, 
Buffalo 

Philadelphia 
Plttsburg 
Baltimore 
Montrea 

Washington 
Atlanta 
New  Orleans 

FOR  STXECT  NVMBCRS  S£E  l.VS 
A                             OF  THIS  BOO* 

OX  fKOKT  COVER 

+ 

Chicago 
Cincinnati 
Cleveland 

St.  Louis 
Kansas  City 
Denver 

San  Francisco 
Seattle 
Minneapolis 

%!*   London,  |  Edinburgh, 

Sydney, 

V 

Prices  in  f  fleet  July  5,  1909.   Subject  to  change  without  notice. 

THE  SPALDING' 


The  Spalding  Double  End  Bag 


t«  la  all  oar  sWrtsftafj  Ba*i  arc  •••>  *f  Par* 
Para    Baaaar     DO    ciaipirtHta)    and    an   Fally    Caaraatnnl 

We  are  making  all  our  double  end  bags  with  one-piece  top  and  substantial  leather  hop.  Really  the  strongest 
construction  we  know  of.  The  bottom  loop  is  also  very  strongly  made.  Each  bag  complete  in  box,  with  bladder, 
lace,  rubber  cord  for  floor,  and  rope  for  ceiling  attachment. 


No.  7.  Made  of  finest  selected  olive  Na 
"  Fitzsimmons "  Special  Bag  No.  1&  I 
lively  bag.  .  .  .  Each,  8B.6O 

No.  6.  Fine  olive  tanned  leather  cover, 
double  stitched,  red  welted  seams.  Extra 
well  made  throughout.  Each,  SO. OO 

No.  B.  Regulation  size,  specially  tanned 
brown  glove  leather  cover,  red  welted 
seams,  double  stitched  and  substantially 
made  throughout  .  Each,  S4.OO 

No.  4%.  Regulation  size,  fine  craven 
tanned  leather  and  red  welted  seams. 
Well  finished  throughout.  Each,  83. 7  B 

No.  4.  Regulation  size,  fine  grain  leather 
cover  and  well  made  throughout,  double 
stitched.  .  .  .  Each,  83. BO 

No.  3.  Regulation  size,  substantial  brown 
leather  cover,  reinforced  and  double 
stitched  seams.  .  .  Each,  82. BO 

No.  a's.  Regulation  size,  good  quality  dark 
olive  tanned  leather,  lined  throughout, 
red  welted  seams.  .  Each,  89. OO 

No.  2.  Medium  size,  good  colored  sheep- 
skin, lined  throughout  Each,  8 1  .BO 

=o  Spalding  </= 
Brass   Inflaters 


No.  2.  Club  size,  cylinder  10  in.  Each,  BO  c. 
No.  3.  Pocket  size. cylinder  5's  in.  "    SBo. 


_  tanned  leather  and  workmanship  of  same  quality  as  in  our 
mble  stitched,  red  welted  seams.    An  extremely  durable  and 

Spalding 
Bladders 

It  is  well  to  specify  when 

ordering    extra    bladden 

whether  they  are  required 

for  tingle  or  double  end 

bags,  as  we  can  furnish  the  f»j*t  »»      «yk  tar 

two  stylet  in  each  grade.    **ff*       •«•» 

No.  B.     With  top  stem,  for  Nos.  2.  2% 

and  3.  ....  Each,  OOc. 
No.  BS.  With  side  stem,  for  Nos.  14 

and  15 Each,  6Oc. 

No.  B.  With  top  stem,  for  Nos.  4,  4%,  5 

and  6 Each,  7 Bo. 

No.  BS.  With  side  stem,  for  Nos.  10,  12, 

16  and  17.  ...  Each,  7Bc. 
No.  7S.  With  side  stem,  for  Nos.  18.  18S, 

19,  19Sand20.  .  .  Each,  OOc. 
No.  7.  With  top  stem. for  No.  7.  Each,  »Oc . 
No.  OM.  Top  stem  for  No.  G.  "  81.96 
No.  OS.  With  top  stem,  heavy  bladder, 

best  quality.  .  .  .  Each,  I  .OO 
No.  D.  Elastic  floor  attachment  for  all  double 

end  bags,  best  quality  cord.  Each,  3Oo . 
No.  E.  Elastic  cord  for  double  end 

bags.      ....       Each,  2Oc. 


A  U  Rubber  Bladders  bearing  our  Trade-Mark  are  made  of  Pure  Para  Rubber  (no  composition)  and  are  guaranteed 
Perfect  in  Material  and  Workmanship.    Note  special  explanation  of  guarantee  on  tag  attached  to  each  bladder. 


Spalding 

Striking 
Bag 
Mitts 


WUI  prated  the  harts  art  reeauerted  tar  ise  with  all  StrtUnj  E*gs. 

No.  I.  Made  of  olive  Napa  Leather  and  extra  well  padded;  ventilated 
palm  and  special  elastic  wrist  in  glove.  .  .  .  Pair,  8 2. BO 

No.  2.  Made  of  soft  tanned  leather,  properly  shaped  and  padded, 
substantially  put  together. Pair,  8 1. BO 

No.  3.  Made  of  soft  tanned  leather,  padded  and  well  made;  also 
made  in  ladies' size. Pair,  7 Be. 

No.  4.    Knuckle  mitt,  well  padded "    BOo. 

Na  B.    Knuckle  mitt,  well  padded.      ....  "    2Bo. 


Camanm 


aSS**.  A.  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS.  *^*tt*a.? 


Ntw  York 
Ekatoa 
STTSCOM 

BBffelO 


Philadelphia    Washington 

Plltsburg          Atlanta 

Baltimore     New  Orleans 

Montreal.  Canada 


San  Francisco 

Seattle 

Minneapolis 

St  Paul 


u\  eflt(t  July  5.  1 


t  to  cnon»r  without  nvlxv. 


THE  SPALDING 


The  Spalding  Disk  Platform 


Home  Apparatus 

"Many  forms  of  exercise 
are  indulged  in  by  folk  de- 
sirous of  improving  their 
physical  condition,  but 
none  of  them  is  more  at- 
tractive and  at  the  same 
time  more  beneficial  than 
bag  punching.  Arms, 
shoulders,  hands,  wrist, 
the  neck  and  legs  are 
brought  into  play  individ- 
ually and  in  combination 
in  bag  punching.  Aside 
from  the  development  in 
these  parts  of  the  body, 
the  shoulders  are  made 
square  and  upright,  the 
chest  is  broadened,  the  eye 
quickened  and  the  brain 
stimulated.  The  direct 
result  is  a  new  being  for 
the  bag  puncher."— Ex- 
tract from  Spalding' s  A  th- 
letic  Library,  No.  191, 
"Bag  Punching." 


Bag  Is  NOT  Included  with  this  Plallo 

Can  be  put  up        r.i..i*4  A*m 

in  a  very  small 
space  and taken 
down  quickly 
when  not  in  use 
by  simply  de- 
taching the 
pipe  fixture 
from  the  wall 

plate. 

The  metal  disk 
against  which 
the  bag  strikes 
constitutes  one 

of  the  best  features  ever  incorporated 
in  an  arrangement  of  this  character, 
rendering  it  almost  noiseless  and 

very  quick  in  action. 
This  disk  also  combines  an  adjust- 
able feature  that  is  simple  to  oper- 
ate and  makes  it  possible  for  various 
members  of  the  family  to  use  the 

same  disk. 

The  Spalding  Adjustable  Disk  Plat- 
form, without  bag. 

No.  PR..    Each,  8B.OO 


The 

Spalding  Patent 

Solid  Striking 

Bag  Disks 

Bag  is  NOT  Included  With 
Either  ol  These  Disks 


Wall  Braced 
Styl. 


A  striking  bag  disk  must  be 

substantial  if  it  is  to  be  of 

use,  and  in  the  various  styles, 

both  adjustable  and  braced, 

which  we  list,  this  feature 

has    not    been    neglected, 

while  we  have  striven  to  put  out  a  disk  which  is  suitable 

for  home  use  and  moderate  in  price. 


No.  F1L     Complete,  Without  Bag. 
Each,  SB. 00 


No.  CR~ 


Complete,  Without  Bag. 
Each,  87. BO 


tommunkntionj 


9RUfi  A.  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 


in  any  of  the  following 


S/raaue 
Buffalo 


Philadelphia   Waihlndton 

Plttsburg          Atlanta 

Baltimore  I  New  Orleans 

Montreal.  Canada 


Chicago 

Cincinnati 
Cleveland 
Columbus 


St.Loolj 

Kansas  City 

Dearer 

Detroit 


San  Francisco 

Seattle 

Minneapolis 

St.  Paul 


ACCEPT  NO 
SUBSTITUTE 


THE  SPALDING 


'TRADE-MARK 


The  Spalding  Championship  Gloves 


The  S  paid  ing  "Cham- 
pionship" Gloves  are 
endorsed  by  all  cham- 
pions and  have  been 
exclusively  used  for 
years  in  champion- 
ship contests  and  in 
training.  The  mate- 
rial and  workman- 
ship are  of  the  high- 
est quality,  the  fit  is 
perfect,  and  by  their 
peculiar  construction 
absolutely  prevent 
any  chance  of  injury 
to  the  hands  or 
wrists.  Each  set  is 
carefully  inspected 
before  packing  and 
guaranteed  in  every 
particular.  Made  in 
three  sizes  in  sets  of 
four  .gloves. 


Used  and  Endorsed  by  Champions 


No.  I  iB.TheSpald 
ing  6-oz.    "Cham- 
pionship "  Glove. 
Per  set  of  four 
gloves,  96  OO 
No.  I  I  6.  The  Spald- 
ing 6-pz.    "Cham- 
pionship "  Glove. 
Per  set  of  four 
gloves,  96.OO 
No.  I  18.  The  Spald- 
ing  8-pz.   "Cham- 
pionship" Glove. 
Per  set  of  four 
gloves,  86.  BO 

Spalding 

•Special    \o.  21 8 

Same  style  as  our 
"Championship" 
S-oz.  Gloves,  but  not 
same  quality  materi- 
al and  workmanship. 
No.  218.  Persetof 
four  gloves.  94. OO 


Spalding  "Navy  Special'* 
Championship  Gloves 

,Vwd  by  the  Champions  of  Ike  Nary 

These  gloves  are  made  of  a  special  "sea 
green  "  leather,  of  particularly  durable 
quality.  Furnished  in  cVoz.  only,  similar  in 

style  to  No.  118,  and  with  padded  wrist  .__    

S.  JOHNSON   No  I8N>  Per  set  of  four  gloves,  88.00  BOXING  IN  THE  NAVY 
^Kerry  Copyright0  Spalding  Pupil's  Boxing  Gloves"" 

Acting  on  the  suggestion  of  one  of  the  most  prominent  athletic 
officials  in  this  country,  we  decided  recently  to  get  up  a  boxing 
glove  that  would  be  an  aid  to  the  pupil  learning  to  box.    This 
glove  is  additionally  padded  on  the  forearm  and  over  the  wrist, 
to  prevent  that  soreness  which  is  one  of  the  most  discouraging        „ 
OH o«  features  following  a  brisk  lesson  in  the  art  of  "blocking."  riMiM wrM «i r«mr 
glove    part  is  well   padded  with  curled  hair,   the  leather  being  best  quality  soft  tanned. 
No.  I  I  O.    Per  set  of  four  gloves,  86. OO 


The  Spalding  Instructors' 
Gloves,  lO-oz. 

Made  of  best  grade  brown  glove 
leather,  extra  heavily  padded  over 
|  the  knuckles  and  with  special 
large  padded  thumb  to  prevent 
I  injury  to  either  instructor  or 
pupil.  Laces  extra  far  to  pro- 
vide ample  ventilation  and  has 

patent  palm  grip. 
No.   IQO.    Per  set  of  four  gloves.  86  OO 


The   Spalding  5-oz. 

Boxing  Gloves 
None  Better  at  Any  Price 

Made  of  special  quality  light  tan- 
colored  glove  leather,  very  soft  and 
smooth.  Plain  laced  wrist-band. 
patent  palm  lacing  and  patent  palm 
grip.  An  ideal  glove  for  limited 

round  contests. 
No.  I  OB.    Per  set  of  four  gloves. 


EACH    SET    OF    BOXING    GLOVES    CONSISTS    Of    FOUR    CLOVES.    MATED    IN    TWO     PAIRS 


A.  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS. * 


Philadelphia    Washington 

PltUburg          Atlanta 

Baltimore    New  Orleans 

Montreal.  Canada 


London.   Edinburgh,    Sydney, 
EniUnd     Scotland     Australia 


Chicago 
Cincinnati 
Cleveland 
Columbui 


St.  Louis 

Kansas  City 

Denver 

Detroit 


San  Francisco 

Seattle 

Minneapolis 

St.  Paul 


PrKef  in  effect  July  5, 1909.   Subject  to  change  without  notice. 


ACCEPT  NO 
SUBSTITUTE 


THESPALDING 


'TRADE-MARK 


GUARANTEES 
QUALITY 


Spalding  Boxing  Gloves 


No.  I  I .  Corbett  pattern, 
large  7-oz.  glove,  best  quali- 
ty brown  glove  leather, 
padded  with  best  curled 
hair,  patent  palm  lacing, 
padded  wristband,  patent 
palm  grip.  Substantially 
made  throughout  for  hard 
usage. 
Set  of  four  gloves,  8B.OO 

No.  9.  Regulation  5-oz.  glove, 
otherwise  same  as  No.  11. 
Set  of  four  gloves,  SB.OO 


Above  illustrates  the  patent  palm  lacing  and  patent  palm  grip  referred  to 
in  descriptions  of  Spalding  boxing  gloves.  With  these  improvements  we 
believe  our  line  is  absolutely  the  finest  on  the  market.  The  patent  palm 
lacing,  insuring  a  snug  fit  at  all  times,  is  a 
very  valuable  feature,  and  the  patent  palm 
grip  we  know,  will  be  appreciated  by  those 
who  want  gloves  that  are  up-to-date  in 
every  particular. 


No.  I  4.  Regulation  5-oz. 
glove,  dark  wine  color,  pad- 
ded wristband,  patent  palm 
lacing  and  palm  grip, 
Much  improved. 
Set  of  four  gloves,  S4.OO 

No.  I  6.  Corbett  pattern.olive 
tanned  leather,  well  padded 
with  hair,  padded  wrist- 
band, patent  palm  lacing, 
patent  palm  grip. 
Set  of  four  gloves,  84.OO 

No.  I  7.  Corbett  pattern,  cra- 
ven tan  leather,  well  pad- 
ded with  hair,  patent  palm 
lacing,  patent  palm  grip, 
padded  wristband. 
Set  of  four  gloves,  94. OO 


No.  11.    Corbett  Patt 


No.  I  9.  Corbett  pattern,  craven  tan  leather, 
well  padded  with  hair,  patent  palm  grip  and 
patent  palm  lacing.  Set  of  four  gloves,  S3.6O 

No.  2 1 .  Corbett  pattern,  dark  wine  color  lea- 
ther. Well  padded  with  hair  and  patent  palm 
lacing.  .  .  Set  of  four  gloves,  83. OO 

No.  23.  Regular  pattern,  fine  quality  brown 
tanned  leather.  A  very  well  made  glove. 
Hair  padded  and  patent  palm  lacing. 

Set  of  four  gloves,  82. OO 

No.  24.  Regular  pattern,  craven  tan  leather, 
hair  padded,  elastic  wristband.  Set,  8 1.  BO 


SPALDING  YOUTHS'  BOXING  GLOVES 

All  Styles,  Padded  with  Hair 

Spalding  Youths'  Boxing  Gloves  are  made  in  exactly  the  same  manner 
and  of  the  same  material  as  the  full  size  gloves  of  our  manufacture  and 

are  warranted  to  give  satisfaction. 

No.  4B.    Youths'  Championship  Glove,  Corbett  pattern,  best  quality 
brown  glove  leather,  extra  well  finished  and  double  stitched,  patent 
palm  lacing  and  patent  palm  grip.      .       Set  of  four  gloves,  83.  BO 
No.  4O.    Youths'  size,  Corbett  pattern,  soft  craven  tan  leather,  well 
padded,  patent  palm  lacing.       .       .       Set  of  four  gloves,  82.  BO 
No  45          No.  2B.    Youths'  size,  regular  pattern,  soft  tanned  leather,  patent 
Corbett  p«tt»m       palm  lacing. Set  of  four  gloves,  8 1 .00 


No.  29 

R«0ulav  PMttm 


ESP^   Co^unication^^    £    Q^  SPALDING 

&1>  T>  f\  c.     in  any  of  the  following          '^Stsl 
DK.\IJt           cities  will  receive  attention. 

New  York 
Boston 
Syracuse 
Suffalo 

Philadelphia 
Plttsburg 
Baltimore 

Washington 
Atlanta 
New  Orleans 
1,  Canada 

FOR  STREET  NUMBERS  SEE  INSIDE  FROffT  COVER 
*                             OF  THIS  BOOK                               * 

Chicago 
Cincinnati 
Cleveland 

Columbus 

St.  Louis 
Kansas  City 
Denver 
Detroit 

San  Francisco 
Seattle 
Minneapolis 
St.  Paul 

¥ 

London, 
England 

Edinburgh, 
Scotland 

Sydney,  |*S? 
Australia  1  ~ 

Prices  la  effect  July  5, 1909.  Subject  O  change  without  notice 


JOHNNY  SUMMERS 

Champion 

Featherweight 

of 

England 


PAT  O'KEEFE 
Champion   Welter  and 
Middleweight  of  Ireland 


OWEN  MORAN 

Bantam   Champion   of 

England 


This  Team  of  Boxers  from  Great  Britain  Use 


Spalding 


Boxing  Gloves 
Boxing  Shoes  and 
Wearing  Apparel 


in  all  their  bouts  and  Spalding  Sweaters,  Punching 
Bags  and  everything  else  required  when  training. 

Spalding  Boxing  Gloves  have  been  used  for  the  past  twenty  years  in  the 
Championship  Contests  in  America. 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


Communications  addressed  to 

A.  C.  8PALDINC  &  BROS. 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention: 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  coverof  this  book. 

Montreal. 
Canada 

London, 

England 

New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 

Boston 
Pittsburg 
Baltimore 

Philadelphia 
Washington 
New  Orleans 

Chicago 
Cleveland 
Detroit 

St.  Louis 
Cincinnati 
Kansas  City 

San  Francisco 
Denver 

Minneapolis 

HESPALDING 


'TRADE-MARK 


*     Spalding 
ymnasiiim  Suits 

lOMBINATION  PRICES  APPLY  ONLY  ON  FIVE  OR  MORE  SUITS 


lo.  1G  SUIT 

Consisting  of  Befall 

[Mo.  6E  Shirt,  white.  $  .50 
No.  4  Running  Pants.  .50 
|sio.K  Shoes.  .  .  .75 

if  articles  com 

posing    outfit    are 
puchased  singly.     $1.75 


".$1.45 


Io.  3G  SUIT 

Consisting  of  Retail 

No.  600  Shirt.     .    $1.50 
No.  4  Y.M.C.A. 

Trousers.     .     .        1.75 

No.  I  Shoes.       .        1.50 

Price,  if  articles  com-  — — 

posing    outfit    are 

purchased  singly.   $4.75 

Combination 
Price     . 


No.  2G  SUIT 

Consisting  of  Retail 

No.  6E  Shirt,  white.  $  .50 
No.  14B  Knee  Pants.  1.00 
No.  K  Shoes.  .  .  .75 

Price,  if  articles  com- 

posing    outfit    are 
purchased  singly.   $2.25 

Combination  $1  QA 
Price  .  .  vl»«W 


No.  4G  SUIT 

Consisting  of  Retail 

No.  600  Shirt.  .  .$1.50 
No.  605  Full  Tights.  2.00 
No.  I  Shoes.  .  .  1.50 
No.  3  Trunks.  .  .  1.00 

Price,  if  articles  com- 

posing    outfit    are 
purchased  singly.    $6.00 

Combination 
Price     .    . 


Philadelphia   Washington 
Plttsburg         Atlanta 
Baltimore    New  Orleans 
Montreal.  Canada 


*l 


Londo 

£nJU 


n.   Ed: 
ad  I   & 


Elf 


Chicago 

Cincinnati 
Cleveland 


St.  Louis 

Kansas  City 

Denver 


San  Francisco 
Seattle 

Minneapolis 


drifts  to  effect  July  5>  1903.  Subject  to  changt  without  notice. 


ACCEPT  NO 
SUBSTITUTE 


THESPALDING 


TRADE- MARK 


SPALDING    GYMNASIUM    SHOES 


Per  pair,  8B.OO 
'•    ,        4.50 


No.  I  6.       Kangaroo,  elkskin  sole,  extra  light,  hand  made.          .... 
No.  I  B5.    Elkskin  sole,  soft  and  flexible  ;  in  ladies'  and  men's  sizes. 

No.  166.     Lowcutshoe,  selected  leather,  extra  light  and  electric  sole;  ladies' and  men's  sizes.    "  3.OO 

No.  9OL.    For  Ladies.    Low  cut  shoe,  good  quality  black  leather,  with  electric  sole  and  corrugated  rubber 

heel    Very  light  and  well  made Per  pair,  82. OO 


No.  85L.  Special  ladies'  low  cut  shoe,  selected 
black  leather,  roughened  electric  sole. 
Per  pair,  S2.OO 
No.  I B.   Fine  horse  hide  low  cut 
shoe,  flexible  oak  sole,  rough- 
ened to  prevent  slipping;  very 
light  and  comfortable. 

Per  pair,  82. OO 

No.  I9L.      For  -Ladies. 

Otherwise' same  as  No.  19.      .      Per  pair,  82. OO 

No.  8 1 .    High  cut    .        .       .  "  a.OO 

No.  2O.    Low  cut;  selected  leather,  electric  sole. 

A  very  easy  and  flexible  shoe.       Per  pair,  81.76 

No.  2OL.    For  Ladies.    Otherwise  this  shoe  is  same 

as  No.  20.       .       .       .       .       Per  pair,  81.78 


No.  I H.  High  cut,  best  grade  canvas 
shoe,  white  rubber  sole;  in  ladies' 
and  men's  sizes;  men's  made  of 
white  canvas,  ladies'  of  black. 

Pair,  81.75  *  $18.00  Dot. 
No.  I .    Low  cut,  best  grade  canvas, 
'ioe.  white  rubber  sole;  in  ladies' 
and  men's  sizes;  men's  made  of 
white  canvas,  ladies'  of  black. 
Pair,  8  I  .BO  *  $15.00  Doz. 
No.  M.  High  cut  canvas, 

rubber  sole. 

'air,  8 1  .OO  *  $10.20  Doz. 
No.  K.   Low  cut  canvas  shoe,  rubber  sole. 

Pair,  76o.  *  $8.00  Doz. 

No.  E.   Low  cut  canvas  shoe,  canvas  sole.    Very  pop- 
ular for  gymnasium.         .       .       Per  pair,  3 8c. 


No.  IH 


SPALDING  LADIES'  SHOES,  WITH  FLEXIBLE  SOLES 

N&  BHL    Ladies'  gymnasium  shoes,  made  of  good  quality  selected  leather,  black  color,  with  elkskin  sole. 

high  cut         .   f     Per  pair,  81. 5O  *  $16.20  Doz. 
No.  PL.    Ladies'  gym.  shoes,  elkskin,  pearl  color,  with 
elkskin  soles,  high  cut.     Pair,  8 1 .00  *  $16.20  Doz. 
No.  OPL.    Same  as  No.  PL,  except  low  cut 

Per  pair,  8 1 .26  if  $13.80  Dot. 
No.  OHL.    This  shoe  is  the  same  as  our  No.  BHL  shoe, 
except  low  cut          Per  pair,  8 1 .26  -te  $13.80  Doz. 
No.  SL.    Ladies'  gym.  shoes,  made  of  selected  leather, 
drab  color,  high  cut       Pair,  8 1  .OO  *  $10.20  Doz. 
No.  OSL.    Same  as  No.   SL,  except  low  cut 

HO.  BHL  Per  pair,  »Oc.  it  $9.60  Dot.  "•• OHL 

Th*  price*  printed  in  italics  opposite  items  marked  with  It  will  be  quoted  only  on  order*  for  one-hay  dozen  or 

•more.    Quantity  prices  NOT  allowed  on  items  NOT  marked  with  it 


ACCEPT  NO 
SUBSTITUTE 


THE  SPALDING 


'TRADE-MARK 


Spaldlng  Elastic  Supporters 


No.  8.    Elastic   pieces 

on  side. 
Each.  BOc.* $5.00 Dot. 


No.  3.    Like  No.  2,  but 

open  mesh  front 
Each.  OQc.  +  tS.OODoz. 


SPALDING  SUSPENSORIES 

The 


Spaldlng  Supporter* 


.Best  Canton  flan- 
nel, one  in  box. 

Each,  2Bc.  *  $2.50 Doz. 

No.  X.  Same  as  No.  1, 
but  cheaper  in  quality. 

Each.  SOc.  if  $2.00  Doz. 


No.  A.    Swimming 
porter.    For  water  polo* 
bathing  and  swimming. 
Each,  BOO. 


Style 

No.  7O.    Non-elastic 
bands,  knitted  sack. 

Each,  SSc. 
No.  7  I .  Elastic  but- 
tock bands,  knitted 
sack.  .  Each,  3Bc. 
No.  7  2.  Elastic  bands, 
knitted  sack.  BOc. 

No.73%.  Elastic bands.silksack. 7Bc. 

No.  76.    Silk  bands,  finest  silk  sack. 
Each,  9 1 .28 


"Old  Point  Comfort"  Ctrl* 

No.  a.    Lisle 
thread  sack. 

Each,  8 1  .OO 
No.  3.  Fine  silk 
sack,  satin  trim- 
mings. 8 1.  as 
No.  4.  Silk 
bands,  satin 
tri  mmings, 
finest  silk  sack.  Each,  8 1. BO 


Bike  Jockey  Strap 

No.  8.  For  ath- 
letes, base  ball, 
foot  ball,  tennis 
players,  etc.  All 
elastic;  no  buck- 
les. Three  sizes: 
Small,  tontwaist 
22  to 28  in.;  Me- 
r.t  NOV.  ».  HOT  dium,30to38in.; 
Large,  40  to  48  inch. 

Each,  76c.  *  $7  50  Dog. 


Spalding  Leather  Abdomen  Protector 

iHeavy  sole  leather, 
well  padded  with 
quilted  lining  and 
non-elastic  bands, 
with  buckles  at 
side  and  elastic  at 
back.  For  boxing, 
hockey,  foot  ball, 
*tc.  No  other  supporter  necessary 
with  this  style.  No.  S.  Each,  83. OO 


Spaldlng 
Aluminum 
Abdomen 
Protector 

Aluminum, 
edges  well 
padded  with 
rubber.  Elas- 
tic cross  bands 
and  belt.  No.3.  Each,  83. BO  , 


Spalding  Wire  Abdomen  Protector 

'Heavy  wire,  well 
padded  with  wool 
fleece  and  chamois.' 
Leather  belt,  straps 
for  fastening.  Used 
with  any  of  our  reg- 
ular supporters  or 
suspensories. 

No.  4.    Each,  88.  OO 


SPALDING    LEATHER    WRIST 

No.  OO.  Grain  lea- 
ther, lined,  single 
strap-and-buckle. 

Each,  aoc. 


No.  I  OO.  Solid  belt 
leather,  tan  or  black, 
single  strap-and- 
buckle.  Each.  26c. 

No.  300.  Solid  belt 
leather,  tan  or  black, 
double  strap-and- 
buckle.  Each,  4Oc. 


SUPPORTERS 

No.  300.  Solid  belt 
leather,  tan  or  black, 
laced  fastening. 

Each,  26c. 

No.  4OO.  Genuine 
pigskin,  lined,  in  im- 
proved English  slitted 
style.  Each,  BOc. 


Spalding  Combination  Fool  Ball  Clove  and  Wrist  Supporter 

Designed  by  H.  B.  Conibear.  Back 
of  hand  protected  by  a  piece  of  sole 
leather,  and  any  strain  to  wrist  is 
avoided  by  leather  strap  supporter 
which  forms  the  upper  part  of  the 
glove.  Made  for  right  or  left  hand. 
No.  I.  Each,  81.28 


The  prices  printed  in  Holies  opposite  items  marked  with  ir  will  be  quoted  only  on  orders  for  one-hay  dozen  or 
more.    Quantity  prices  NOT  allowed  on  items  NOT  marked  with  if 


addres: 


New  York 
Boston 

Syracuse 
BpHilo 


Philadelphia 
Plttsburg 
Baltimore 


Washington 

Atlanta 
New  Orleans 


Montreal.  Canada 


FOR  STREET  NUMBERS 


London,  Edinburgh,    Sydn 
I  England  I  Scotland  |  A 


Chicago 
Cincinnati 
Cleveland 

Columbui 


St.  Louis 

Kansas  City 

Denver 

Detroit 


San  Francisco 

Seattle 

Minneapolis 

St.  Paul 


Prica  in  effect  July  5, 1909.  Subject  to  change  without  notice. 


THE  SPALDING' 


QUALITY 


The   Spalding  Improved 
Patent  Ankle  Supporter 


l.otta  Jmlj  14.  1»OS    N..  8*1. » 

Improved  on  original  Backer  patent 
of  which  A.  G.  Spaldlng  *  Bra*,  were 
the  sole  licensees 


There  is  no  team  in  the  back  of 
any  o)  our  ankle  supporters. 
Nothing  in  their  construction 
to  chale  the  foot,  and  they  are 
shaped  specially  to  fit  back  of 
foot  snugly  over  heel.  This  t» 

a  patented  feature. 
Worn  over  or  under  stocking 
and  support  the  ankle  admir- 
ably, while  not  interfering  in 
any  way  with  free  movements. 
Relieve  pain  immediately  and 
cure  a  sprain  in  a  remarkably 
short  time.  In  ordering,  give 

size  of  shoe  worn 
No.  H.    Soft  tanned  leather,  best  quality.    .    Pair,  •  I  .OO 
No.  SH.  Good  quality  sheepskin,  well  made.  .BO 

No.  CH.  Black  duck,  lined  and  bound.          .        "          .SB 


Knee  Cap  Bandage 

In  ordering,  give  circumference  below 
knee,  at  knee  and  just  above  knee,  and 
state  if  light  or  strong  pressure  is  desired. 
No.  4.  Cotton  thread.  Each,  VI. BO 
No.  4A.  Silk  thread.  .  "  2.OO 

Elbow  Bandage 
In  ordering,  give  circum- 
ference above  and  below 
elbow,  and  state   if    for 

lighter  strong  pressure. 

EACH 

No.  3.    Cotton  thread  .91  .BO 
No.  9A.  Silk  thread.         9.OO 


Spalding  Wrist  Bandage 


Give  circumference  around 
smallest  part  of  wrist .  and  state 
whether  for  light  or  strong 
pressure.  EACH 
No.e.  Cotton  thread. S  .75 
No.  «A.  Silk  thread.  I  .OO 


Ankle  Bandage 

In  ordering, 

circumference 

around 

ankle 

and 

over 

instep;  state  if  light  or  strong 

pressure  is  desired.      EACH 

No.B.  Cotton  thread.*  I  .BO 

No. BA.  Silk  thread.    2.OO 


Spalding  Shoulder  Cap  Bandage 


Composed  of  threads  of  rubber  com- 
pletely covered.  Light,  porous  and 
easily  applied.  The  pressure  can  be  ap- 
plied wherever  necessary,  following  all 
depressions  or  swellings  with  folding 
and  unvarying  uniformity.  Quickly  se- 
cured by  inserting  end  under  last  fold. 
No.  3O.  Width  3  inches,  6  yards 
long  (stretched).  .  Each,  9 1  .OO 
No.  SB.  Width  2'.  inches,  5  yards 
long  (stretched).  .  Each,  7 Bo. 

Spalding  Elastic  Belt 


Our  elastic  foot  ball  belt  stretches  with 
the  length  of  body  and  may  be  attached 
to  jacket  and  pants,  thus  forming  one 
continuous  suit.  By  closely  f.tting  the 
body,  the  opposing  player  has  less 
chance  of  tackling.  Allows  perfect 

freedom  in  all  positions. 

No.  I.    Width 6 inch.      Each,  •  I. BO 

This  style  belt  is  used  in  our  No.VTJ 

Union  Foot  Ball  Suit 


Philadelphia    Washington 
rittiburg          Atlanta 
Baltimore  I  New  Orleans 


Prictt  in  tffKtJulu  S.  1909.   Sutjrtt  to  (haw  without  noticf. 


THE  SPALDING 


ATHLETIC  SHIRTS,  TIGHTS  AND  TRUNKS 

STOCK  COLORS  AND  SIZES.    Wanted  Ca«««.  Bert  Qmallty.    We  carry  following  colors  regularly  in  (lock: 

Bbck.  Navy  Blue  and  Maroon,  in  stock  sizes.     Shirts,  26  to  44  in  chest     Tights,  A  to  42  in.  waist.    Other  colors  and  luo  nude 

to  order  at  special  prices.     Estimates  on  application. 

On-  N*.  WO  Ltae  Wonted  Comb.    Furnished  in  Gray  and  White.  Navy  Blue,  Maroon  and  Black  only.     Stock  mcj  :  Shim. 

26  to  44  in.  chest  ;  Tights.  28  to  42  in.  waist 

Sultary  Cotton  Good*.    Colors:  Bleached  White,  Navy.  Black,  Maroon  and  Gray.    Stock  sizes  :  36  to  44  in.  eti'it ;  Tirbu, 

Spalding  Sleeveless  Shirts 

No.  I E.    Best  Worsted,  full  fashioned,  stock  colors  and  sizes.    Each,  83. OO 
No.  6OO.  Cut  worsted,  stock  colors  and  sizes.      Each,  S  I  .BO  *  $13.50  Doz. 
kNo.  6E.  Sanitary  Cotton, stock  colors  and  sizes.  Each.BOc.  •*•  White,  4.50  Doz. 

Spalding  Striped  Sleeveless  Shirts  *  Color8'  ^•75Doz- 

No.  6OOS.  Cut  Worsted;  with  4-inch  stripe  around  chest,  in  following  com- 
binations of  colors;  Navy  with  White  stripe;  Black  with  Orangestripe;  Maroon 
,  with  White  stripe;  Red  with  Black  stripe;  Royal  Blue  with  White  stripe;  Black 
I  with  Red  stripe;  Gray  with  Cardinal  stripe.  .  Each,  8 1 .50  it  $15.00  Doz. 
|  No.  6ES.  Sanitary  Cotton,  solid  color  body,  with  4-inch  stripe  around  chest, 
|in  same  combinations  of  colors  as  No.  600S.  .  Each,  7Bc.  if  $7.50  Doz. 

Spalding  Shirts  with  Sash 

No.  6ED.  Sanitary  Cotton,  sleeveless,  solid  color  body  with  sash  of  differ- 
entcolor.  Same  combinationsof  colors  as  No.  600S.  Each,75c.  it  $7.50  Doz. 

Spalding  Quarter  Sleeve  Shirts 

No.  IF.  Best  Worsted,  full  fashioned, stock  colors  and  sizes.  Each,  83. OO 
No.OOI.  Cut  Worsted, stock  colors  and  sizes.  Each.  81. BO  if  $15.00Doz. 
No.  6F.  Sanitary  Cotton,  stock  colors  and  sizes.  0Oc.  if  White,  4.50  Doz. 

Spalding  Full  Sleeve  Shirts  *Col°rs.  WDoz. 

No.  3D.    Cotton,  Flesh,  White,  Black Each,  8 1. OO 


No.  6ED 


Spalding  Knee  Tights 

No.  IB.     Best  Worsted,  full 
fashioned,   stock  colors    and 
(sizes.    .       .       Pair,  S3  OO 
|No.  6O4.   Cut  Worsted,  stock 
olors  and  sizes.    Pair,  8 1 .  BO 
if  $13.50  Doz. 

|No.  4B.  Sanitary  Cotton, stock 
(colors  and  sizes.  Pair,  BOc. 
I*  White,  $4.50  if  Colors,  $4.75 

Spalding 
Full  Length  Tights 

!  No.  I  A.    Best  Worsted,  full 
fashioned,  stock  colors  and 
sizes.    .        .        Pair,  84. OO 
Cut  Worsted,   stock  colors  and 
Pair.  82.OO  *  £27.00  Doz. 
Cotton,  full  quality.    White,  Black, 
Pair,  •  I  .OO  *  $9.00  Doz. 

Spalding 
Worsted  Trunks 

No.  I .  Best  Worsted,  Black, 
Maroon  and  Navy.  Pr.,82.OO 

NO.! No.  2.     Cut  Worsted,   Navy 

end  black.  Special  colors  to  order.  Pr. ,  8 1  .OO 


Spalding  Running  Pants 

No.  I.  White  or  Black 
Sateen,  fly  front,  lace  back. 
Pair,  81.25*  1/2.00  Doz. 
No.  2.  White  or  Black 
Sateen,  fly  front,  lace  back. 
Pair,  8 1  .OO  *  $9.00  Doz. 
No.  3.  White  or  Black 
Silesia,  fly  front,  lace  back. 
Pair,  7 Be.  if  $7.50  Doz. 
No.  4.  White,  Black  or  Gray 
Silesia,  fly  front,  lace  back. 
Pair,  BOc.  if  $5.00  Doz. 


Silk  Ribbon  Stripes  down  sides  of  any  of  these 

running  pants 

2Bc,  per  pair  extra.      if      $2.40  Doz. 
Silk  Ribbon  Stripe  around  wiist  on  any  of 

these  running  pants 
2 Be.  per  pair  extra.        if      $2.40  Doz. 

Spalding  Velvet   Trunks 

No.  3.    Fine  Velvet.     Colors^ 

Black,  Navy,  Royal  Blue,  Ma-" 

roon.     Special  colors  to  order. 

Pair,  8 1  .OO  *  $10.00  Doz. 

No.  4.    Sateen.  Black.White. 

Pair,  BOc.  *  £5.00  Doz. 


fke  prices  printed  in  italics  opposite  items  marked  with  if  will  be  quoted  only  on  orders  for  on+half  dozen  or 
more.    Quantity  prices  NOT  allowed  on  item  NOT  marked  with  it 


r.  SPALDING  & 


New  York 
Boston 
SvracuM 
Buffalo 


Philadelphia  Washington 
Plttsburg         Atlanta 
Baltimore    New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cincinnati 
Cleveland 
ColurabuJ 


St.  Louis 

Kansas  City 

Denver 

Detroit 


San  Francisco 

Seattle 

Minneapolis 

St.  Paul 


fricti  ia  effect  July  5, 190&  Subject  {a  thaw  itUhPUt  MW*t 


SSTHESPALDING 


'TRADE-MARK 


SPALDING  OUTDOOR 

RUNNING  Suns 

Combination  prices  will  be  quoted  on  five  or 
more  suits  as  specified. 


Consisting  of 


IS     SUIT 


No.  6E  Shirt,  white.  . 
No.  4  Running  Pants.  . 
No.  K  Shoes  .  . 
Price,  if  articles  composing 

outfit  are  purchased  singly.  $1.75 

Combination    Price  ,  $  1  .45 

Striping  Pants  down  sides  or  around  waist.  20c.  pair  extra 


Consisting  of 


2S   SUIT 


No.  6E  Shirt,  white. 
No.  4  Running  Pants. 
No.  11  Shoes.       . 
Price,  if  articles  composing 


Rrtall 

$  .50 

.50 

3.00 


outfit  are  purchased  singly.  $4.00 

Combination   Price,  $3.3O 

Striping  Pants  down  sides  or  around  waiat,  20c.  pair  extra 


Consisting  of 


No.   3S   SUIT 


No.  600  Shirt.      . 
No.  3  Running  Pants. 
No.  1  IT  Shoes.    . 
Price,  if  articles  composing 


Retail 

$1.50 
.75 

4.00 


outfit  are  purchased  singly.  $6.25 

Combination  Price,  $5.3O 

Striping  Pants  down  sides  or  around  waist,  SOc.  pair  extra 


A.  G.  SPALDIWG  &  BROS^^'SffSdJ" 


New  Tork 
Bocton 

tjncmt 
Buffalo 


Philadelphia 
rttubnrg 

Baltimore 


Washington 

Atlanta 
New  Orleani 


STdney.   |« 
AntralU  1 


Chicago 
Cincinnati 
Cleveland 
Columbus 


St.  Lou 

Kanua  City 

Denver 

Detroit 


San  rructaco 
Seattle 

Mlnneapollf 
SI.  Pan] 


Price  In  tffKt July 5. 1909.  Sulftcl  (pcAoiyr  without toUce, 


S&TOESRNJMNG 


'TRADE-MARK  GUnT,N,TTEvES 


THE  SPALDINE  TRADE  MARK  IS  PLACED  UPON  EVERY  GENUINE  SPALDINC  ARTICLE.  ACCEPT  NO  SDMT1T8TL 


Spalding 

LONG-DISTANCE 


RUNNING  SHOES 


SPALDING  RUNNING  SHOES 
were  worn  by  many  of  the 
American  Team  at  the 
Olympic  Games,  London, 
and  the  news  of  the  un- 
paralleled success  of  the 
men  from  these  shores  came 
to  us  with  the  added  know- 
ledge that  we  had  con- 
tributed in  at  least  some 
small  degree  to  make  their 
victory  so  conclusive.  We 
had  been  building  for  just 
this  result  for  over  twenty 
years,  or  since  our  shoes 
have  been  made  in  the 
Spalding  Factory,  sparing 
no  pains  or  expense  in  our 
endeavor  to  turn  out  abso- 
lutely perfect  athletic 
shoes,  -and  when  the  im- 
portance of  having  a  shoe 
expert  on  the  ground  with 
the  American  athletes  at 
the  Olympic  Games,  Lon- 
don, was  borne  to  us,  our 
expert  went  to  give  what- 
ever aid,  counsel  and  en- 
couragement he  could  to 
the  sterling  athletes  who 
competed  for  the  glory, 
of  America  and  the  Stars' 
and  Stripes. 


BUILT  TO  WIN. 

The  same  models  as  used  bj 
many  of  the  competitors  ID 

1908  Olympic  Games,  London. 

No.  MB.  High  cut  Made  with 
special  pure  gum  "diamond 
point'  '  rubber  soles  and  special 
quality  black  leather  uppers. 
Full  finished  inside  so  as  not 
to  hurt  the  feet  in  a  long  race. 
Hand  sewed.  This  is  a  sped*) 
shoe,  not  carried  in  stock,  and 
made  to  order  only.  We  can- 
not  guarantee  the  soles  on 
these  shoes  as  they  are  pur* 
gum,  which,  while  the  best  and 
most  costly  material  for  the 
purpose,  is  not,  unfortunately. 
the  most  durable.  Pair,  $8.OO 
No.  MO.  Low  cut  Made  with 
corrugated  Up  rubber  sole  and 
cushioned  leather  heel;  specia: 
quality  black  leather  uppers. 
Pull  finished  inside  so  as  not  to 
hurt  the  feet  in  a  long  race. 
Hand  sewed.  Per  pair,  S5.OO 

No.  MH.  High  cut  Made  with 
corrugated  tap  rubber  sole  and 
cushioned  leather  heel;  special 
quality  black  leather  uppers. 
Pull  finished  inside  so  as  not  to 
hurt  the  feet  in  a  long  race. 
Hand  sewed.  Pair,  $5.OO 


The  above  represent  the  three 
styles  most  popular  among 
American  distance  runntrs. 


A.G.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 


Hew  York 
Boston 

Syracuse 
Buffalo 


Philadelphia 
rttttbnrg 
Baltimore 


Washington 

Atlanta 
New  Orleans 


Montreal.  Canada 


Undon.  I  Edinburgh, 
England     Scotland 


.Prices  ia  effect  July  5, 1909.  Subject  to  chajtgt  without  /ictfce, 


THE  SPALDING 


Spalding'lighest  Quatity"  Sweaters 

We  allow  four  inches  for  stretch  in  all 
our  sweaters,  and  sizes  are  marked 
accordingly.  It  w  suggested,  however, 
that  for  very  heavy  men  a  sue  about  two 
inches  larger  than  coat  measurement 
be  ordered  to  insure  a  comfortable  fit. 

\V/ORSTED  SWEATERS.  Made  of 
W  special  quality  wool,  and  ex- 
ceedingly soft  and  pleasant  to 
wear.  They  are  full  fashioned  to  body 
and  arms  and  put  together  by  hand,  not 
simply  stitched  up  pn  a  machine  as  are 
the  majority  of  garments  sold  as  regu- 
lar made  goods.  The  various  grades 
in  our  "Highest  Quality"  Sweaters  are 
identical  in  quality  and  finish,  the  dif- 
Colort:  White,  Navy  Bine,  ference  in  price  being  due  entirely  to 
Black,  Gray,  Maroon  and  variations  in  weight  Our  No.  A  A 
Cardinal.  Other  colors  to  order  Sweaters  are  considerably  heavier  than 
Prices  OH  application.  All  made  the  heaviest  sweaters  ever  knitted  and 
with  9-inch  collars,  sizes  28  to  ^n,"ot  be  fur,nlsned  by  any  other 
, ,  .-„  maker,  as  we  have  exclusive  control 

of  this  special  weight. 

No.  AA.  The  proper  style  for  use  after  heavy  exercise,  inducing 
copious  perspiration  for  reducing  weight  or  getting  into  condition  for 
athletic  contests.  Particularly  suitable  for  Foot  Ball  and  Skating. 
Heaviest  sweater  made.  .  .  Each,  98. OO  ir  (84.00  Doz. 

No. A.  "Intercollegiate, "special weight.  "  e.OO  if  60.00 Doz. 
No.  B.  Heavy  weight. 

Each,  SB.OO  ir  $54.00  Doz. 

Spaldlng  Shaker  Sweater 

We  introduced  this  wool  sweater  to  fill  a 
demand  for  as  heavy  a  weight  as  our 
"Highest  Quality"  grade,  but  at  a  lower 
price,  and  after  much  experimenting,  we 
are  in  a  position  to  offer  it  in  the  fol- 
lowing colors  only  .  Black,  Navy  Blue, 
Maroon,  Gray  or  White.  Sizes  30  to  44 
inches. 

No.  3.  Standard  weight,  slightly  lighter 
than  No.  B.        .       .        Each,  83. 5O 


Spaldlng  Combined  Knitted  Muffler 
and  Chest  Protector 

No.  M.    Made   of  special   weight, 

highest  quality  worsted  in  solid  colors. 

Gray,  Black,  Navy  and  Cardinal,  to 

match  our  sweaters. 

Each,  •  I  .OO 


SPALDING 

WINTER  SPORTS 
SWEATER 


No.  WJ.  Most  satisfactory  and 
comfortable  style  for  all  winter 
sports ;  also  useful  for  training 
purposes,  reducing  weight,  tramp- 
ing during  cold  weather,  golfing, 
shooting,  tobogganing,  showshoe- 
ing ;  in  fact,  for  every  purpose 
where  a  garment  is  required  to  give 
protection  from  cold  or  inclement 
weather.  Made  with  a  high  collar 
that  may  be  turned  down,  changing 
it  into  the  neatest  form  of  a  button 
front  sweater.  Gray  only ;  in  highest 
quality  special  heavy  weight  wors- 
ted. Size,  28  to  44  in.  Each,  97. DO 


STttlAl  IWTKE-We  will  tanbk  u>  ol  UK  aim  MM  wlor  mcaltn  wtlli  <MK  rater  kody  at 

No.  WJ  with  collar 

The  priett  printed  in  italics  opposite  items  marked  with  ir  will  be  quoted  only  on  orders  for  one  half  dozen  or 
more.    Quantity  priett  NOT  allowed  on  items  NOT  marked  with  ir 


A.  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 


PrksititlfKl July  5,1909.  Subfnl  It  tHayv  without  jiott*,  <| 


Spalding  Coat  Jerseys 


Following  sizes  carried  in  stock  regu- 
larly in  all  qualities:  18U>4A  inch  chest. 
Other  sizet  at  an  advanced  price.  Wt 
allow  two  inches  for  stretch  in  all  our 
Jerseys,  and  sizes  are  marked  accordingly.  It  is  suggested,  however,  that  tor  very  heavy  men  a  tize  about 
two  inches  larger  than  coat  measurement  be  ordered  to  insure  a  comfortable  fit.  Any  other  combinations 
of  colors  or  different  width  trimming  or  stripe  to  order  only  and  at  an  advanced  price.  Quotations 

on  application. 


The  Spalding  Coat  Jerseys  are  made  of  the 
same  worsted  yarn  from  which  we  manu- 
facture our  better  grade  Jerseys,  Nos.  10P 
and  12P,  and  no  pains  have  been  spared  to 
turn  them  out  in  a  well  made  and  attractive 
manner.  Colors:  Solid  Gray;  Gray  trimmed 
Navy;  Gray  trimmed  Cardinal  ;  Gray 

trimmed  Dark  Green.    Pearl  Buttons. 
No.  I  OC.    Same  grade  as  our"  No.  10P. 

Each,  S3.  60  if  $36.00  Doz. 
No.  1  2C.    Same  grade  as  'our  No.  12P. 

Each,  S3.OO  •*•  $30.00  Doz. 

No.  I  OCP.    Pockets,  otherwise  same  as 

No.  IOC.      Each,  S4.OO  it  #2.00  Doz. 


No*.  10PX  and  12PX 


Spalding  Striped  and  V-neck  Jerseys 

No.  I  OPW.  Good  quality  worsted,  same  grade  as  No.  10P.  Solid  color 
sleeves,  6-inch  stripe  around  body.  Colors:  Black  and  Orange ;  Navy 
and  White;  Black  and  Red;  Gray  and  Cardinal;  Royal  Blue  and  White; 
Columbia  Blue  and  White ;  Scarlet  and  White ;  Navy  and  Cardinal; 
Maroon  and  White.  Second  color  mentioned  is  for  body  stripe. 

Each,  93.3B  *  $33.00  Dot. 

No.  I  2PW.  Worsted,  with  solid  color  sleeves  and  6-in.  stripe  around 
body.  Colors,  same  as  No.  10PW.  .  Each,  82.75  if  $SO.OO  Doz. 

No.  IOPX.    Good  quality  worsted,  fashioned;  solid  color  body,  with 
alternate   striped   sleeves,   usually   two 
inches  of  same  color  as  body,  with  narrow 
stripe  of  any  desired  color.   Colors  same  as 
No.  10PW.   Each,  S3. 26  *  fSS.OODoz. 

No.  I2PV.  Worsted,  solid  colors,  has 
V-neck  instead  of  full  collar  as  on  regular 
jerseys.  Colors:  Navy  Blue,  Black,  Ma- 

roon  and  Gray.  En., 92.7  Bit  $30.00  Doz. 

No.  I2PX.  Worsted,  solid  color  body,  with 
alternate  striped  sleeves.  Same  arrange- 
ment and  assortment  of  colors  as  No. 
10PW.  Each,  S2.70  *  $30.00  Doz.  NO.  12PV 


The  prices  printed  in  italics  opposite  items  marked  with  if  will  be  quoted  only  on  orders  for  one-half 
dozen  or  more.    Quantity  prices  NOT  allowed  on  items  NOT  marked  with  if 


Communications  A      f* 

addressed  to     A.   Vj. 


A.    HsY/\C 
OC     DK\f&* 


New  York 
Boston 
Syracuse 
Buffalo 


Philadelphia    Washington    FOR  STREET  si'mms  SEE  IXSO>E  TSONT  cars* 

Plttsburg         Atlanta      Lj^ of  THIS  BOOK * 

Baltimore    New  Orleans  TO? I  London,  I  Edinburgh,  I  Sydney,   !M? 
Montreal  Canada  '    England     Scotland     Australia    T 


Chicago 

Cincinnati 
Cleveland 

Columbus 


St.  Louis 

Kansas  CKj 

Denver 

Detroit 


San  Francisco 

Seattle 

Minneapolis 

St.  Fan! 


^  Pricti  in  effect  July  5,  1909.  Subject  la  change  u-ithout  notice. 


SuitTHESWLDINGi 


'  TRADE- MARK 


Spalding  Jacket  Sweaters 


Sizes  t8  to  U  inch  chest  measurement.     We  allow  four  inches  for  stretch  in  all 

our  sweaters,  and  sizes  are  marked  accordingly.    A  is  suggested,  however,  that 

for  very  heavy  men  a  size  about  two  inches  larger  than  coat  measurement  be 

ordered  to  insure  a  comfortable  fit. 


Ne.VG.  Showlna  ip«d»l  trimmed  »dg 
Ing  »nd  cuffi  «uppilea,  If  dcilrad.  ei 
J«ck«t  sweater*  •!  no  e*tr»  ch«rg 


BUTTON  FRONT 

No.VG.  Best  quality  worsted, 
heavy  weight,  pearl  buttons. 
Made  in  Gray,  White  and  Dark 
Brown  Mixture  only. 

Each,  86.OO  +$60.00  Doz. 
No.  DJ.  Fine  worsted, standard 
weight,  pearl  buttons,  fine  knit 
edging.  Made  in  Gray,  White 
and  Sage  Gray  only. 

Each,  9R.OOif$5i.OO-Doz. 
No.  3J.  Standard  weight  wool, 
shaker  knit,  pearl  buttons.  In 
Gray  or  White  only. 

Each,  9*.OO+t4S.OODoz. 

WITH  POCKETS 

No.  VCP.  Best  quality  wors- 
ted, heavy  weight,  pearl  but- 

'"    tons.    Made  up  in  Gray  or  White  only.    With  pocket  on  either  side 
*'    and  a  particularly  convenient  and  popular  style  for  golf  players. 

Each,  96. OO  if  $75.00  Doz. 


Spalding 
Vest  Collar  Sweaters 

No.  BC.  Best  quality  worsted,  good 
weight.  Gray  or  White  only,  with  ex- 
treme open  or  low  neck. 

Each,  S6.BO  *  $57.00  Dot. 

Boys'  Jacket  Sweater 

No.  3  JB.    This  is  an  all  wool  jacket 
sweater,  with  pearl  buttons;   fur- 
nished in  Gray  only,  and  sizes  from 
30  to  36  inches  chest  measurement. 
Each,  S3. OO    *  $33.00  Doz. 
SKOAL  !WTKZ-Wt  will  tanfek  uy  •(  Uw  ikm  MM  eater  iwulm  wttk  I 
(Ml  Urtftt)  colUr  at  aOt  te  *Kk  eaten  «l»  n 
TMt  Mt*  Ml  ipply  la  lk<  N«.  JJI  Uff  $»f H". 


No.  3JB 


Th*  prices  printed  in  italics  opposite  items  marked  with  ir  will  be  quoted  only  on  orders  for  one  half  dozen  or 

>  mort.     Quantity  priett  NOT  aUowed  on  iUms  NOT  marked  u-ilh  if 


Mew  York 
Bocton 

Siracuit 
Buffalo 


Philadelphia 

Pittiburfl 

Baltimore     New  Orleaju 

Montrrjil    Cxnmd 


sntrr  xvmiois  st£  ixsax  /now  core* 


Edinburgh,!  Sydney.  |V 
Scotland      Autlralla      ' 


Prtat  In  efftttjuly  5. 1909.   Subjetl  to  dtangr  uith~*  poUc*. 


HE  SPALDING 


'TRADE-MARK 


TntSPALDlNG  TRADE-MARK  IS  PLACED  UPON  EVERY  GENUINE  SPAWNS  ARTICLE.  ACCEPT  MO  S8BSTITBTE.    I 


The  Spalding  Automatic  Abdominal  Masseur 

A  Sale  and  Sore  Core  for  Constipation  and  Other  Kindred  AllmrnU 
The  Automatic  Abdominal  Masseur  is  offered  the  public  for  treatment  of 
constipation,  based  upon  the  principle  of  muscular  contraction  (the  force 
which  nature  uses),  and,  by  its  mechanical  arrangement,  it  effectually 
applies  force  in  the  same  direction  that  nature  does,  and  will  gradually  dis- 
card the  use  of  cathartics.  So  promptly  does  the  Automatic  Abdominal 
Masseur  excite  the  muscular  contraction  of  the  intestines,  that  only  a  few 
moments'  use  at  the  proper  time  is  necessary  before  its  effects  will  be  felt. 
Its  action  upon  the  liver  and  stomach  ia  equally  as  prompt  and  effective,  and) 
derangements  of  these  organs  are  speedily  remedied. 

N.  E  cor.  15lb  ind  Loctsl  Sis,  Pbllldrlphii.  Pi. 
A.  G.  HALOING  1  BROS.  Miy  Jlth.  I  MM. 

GtiUcwn :  I  ton  mx4  Ike  SpiUiag  Ailuutk  AM»- 
Infl  Misvur  in  my  practice  Iw  «tr  filttM  yttrt.  1  have 
loud  H  •)  iTttl  kcMfll  la  ckroak  oasUMtUa  tmt  iailftt- 


5.OO 


5.OO 
«-BO 


lion.    YMT  taprovnral  berate* 

Very  Inly  y«rs,  WALTER  A.  FORD,  M.D. 

The  Spalding   Automatic   Abdominal   Masseur. 
Equipped  with  Japanned  Detachable  Gear 
Cover.         .         .         Complete,  8 1  O.OO 

Spalding  Home  Gymnasium  Board 

A  Complete  Gymnasium  for  the  Home  on  one  Board 

Convenient,  does  not  take  up  much  room,  is  always  ready,  and  is  really  the 
most  compact,  simplest  and  oest  arrangement  for  providing  a  complete  set 
of  home  exercising  apparatus  that  has  ever  been  devised.  —CONSISTS  OF 
Board  with  attachments  for  fastening  to  floor  of  room 

so  that  walls  need  not  be  marred.        .         .         8'  O.OO 
Spalding  Abdominal  Masseur.  ...  I  O.OO 

No.  PR  Spalding  Adjustable  Striking  Bag  Disk. 
No.  2  Spalding  Chest  Weight  Machine,  including  pair 

of  5-lb.  Dumb  Bells. 

No.  14  Spalding  Striking  Bag.  •    .  _^__ 

Complete,  all  attached,  S3  i  .80 

Board  itself  will  be  furnished  separately  if  desired.  .  Each,  8 1  O.OO 
Board  only  is  fastened  to  floor.  Braces  are  padded  with  leather,  so  that 
walls  will  not  be  damaged.  Can  be  put  up  in  any  room  with  a  ceiling  8  ft.  high. 
As  the  Complete  outfit  is  made  up  and  carried  in  stock  by  us,  equipped  as 
noted  above,  we  cannot  supply  board  with  different  articles  already  attached. 

Leather  Covered  Shot-For  Abdominal 

No.  A.  Consists  of  an  iron  ball,  which  is  wound 
with  electric  tape  and  is  then  covered  with  a 
very  soft  and  smooth  grade  of  horsehide.  It  is 
made  in  either  6  or  8  Ibs.  weight.  Each,  SB.OO 

Spalding  Bar  Stalls 

This  well  known  and  popular  piece  of  apparatus  is  particu- 
larly adapted  for  use  in  the  home,  as  it  is  compact,  of  sim- 
ple construction,  and  because  it  may  be  used  for  the  greatest 
variety  of  movements  affecting  every  part  of  the  body.  The 
principal  requirements  of  apparatus  for  the  home  are  abdo- 
men and  chest  movements,  and  for  these  the  Bar  Stall  is 
especially  adapted.  The  Stall  may  be  erected  against  the 
wall,  behind  a  door,  or  against  any.  other  flat  surface.  The 
dimensions  are  eight  feet  high,  thirty-six  inches  wide  on 
center  of  uprights,  and  it  extends  six  inches  into  the  room. 
No.  aoH.  For  home  use.  Per  section,  88. OO 


Spalding 
Bar  Stall  Bench 

Made  of 
hard  pine, 
strong  and 
substan- 
tial. The"3 
top  is  padded  with  hair  felt  and 
covered  with  canvas.  We  think 
it  is  preferable,  for  sanitary 
reasons,  that  this  canvas  should 
be  painted  (a  special  elastic 
paint  is  used),  and  unless  other- 
wise specified,  our  stock 
benches  will  be  so  furnished. 
No.  9O5.  Single.  Ea.,84.oo 


A.  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS.^c&'SSf*^ 


New  York 

Boston 
Syracuse 
Buffalo 


Philadelphia 
nttsburfi 

Baltimore 


Washington 

Atlanta 
New  Orleans 
I.  Canada 


Edinburgh,    Sydney, 
Scotland     Australia 


frvxs  in  effect  July  5. 1909.  Sutfed  to  change  without  notice. 


THE  SPALDING 


'TRADE-MARK 


I    TO  WHIM  TIAK-MAM  IS  rUtfl  BrtH  EVtIY  CEH.INE  SPAWNS  ARTICLE.  ACCEPT  MO  SHBSTITUTF 


Spalding 
Chest  Weight 


This  machine  has  the  Center 
Arm  Adjustment,  whiih  per- 
miU  of  all  the  lower  as  well  as 
the  direct  and  upper  chest 
movements.  The  various 
changes  are  made  by  raising  or 
lowering:  the  center  arm,  re- 
quiring but  a  few  seconds.  It 
really  combines  two  machines 
in  one,  and  is  particularly  suit- 
able for  home  use  where  space 
is  a  consideration.  Japan  fin- 
ish. One  of  the  most  reliable 
and  satisfactory  machines  ever 
"built  Each  Machine  is  equip- 
ped with  16  pounds  of  weights. 

CHEST  WEIGHT  MACHINE 
No.  5.     .      Each.  S1S.H 


Spalding  Foot  and  Leg  Attachment 


Illustrating   Mettled  of    Faatenlng    Foot 

•ad    L*g    Attachment   to    No.    5    Ch.it 

Weight    Machine. 

No.  2.    Well  made  of  heavy  cowhide; 

Readily  attached  to  one  handle  or  both; 

can   be   worn  with   or   without   shoe. 

Each,  SI  .50 

Spalding  Head  and  Neck 
Attachment 


Illustrating     Method    of    Fastening     Head 
•  nd     Neck    Attachment    to    No.    5    Cheat 
Wolght  Machine. 

No.  3.  Well  made  of  heavy  cowhide, 
Ready  for  use  by  simply  snapping  to 
one  of  the  handles  or  both.  Each,  8  I .  BO 


Home  Apparatus 

Home  apparatus,  suitable 
for  home  use,  and  not 
altogether  by  the  boys 
and  girls  of  the  house- 
hold, but  by  the  grown- 
ups; as  a  matter  of  fact, 
the  ones  who  usually  re- 
quire exercise  of  a  rational 
kind  much  more  than  the 
younger  generation  who 
have  the  time  and  inclina- 
tion for  outdoor  exercise 
not  possessed  by  many  of 
their  elders— that  is  what 
we  will  attempt  to  show 
in  this  section  of  our 
catalogue. 

Used  in  connection  with 
our  various  Athletic 
Libraries  there  is  no  rea- 
son why  any  man  cannot 
practically  renew  his 
youthful  vigor. 


Spalding 
Rowing:  Attachments 


The  Rowing  Attachments  listed 
below,  which  are  to  be  used  in 

^  x  x —  "J   connection    with   Chest  Weight 

Machines,  will  be  found  particularly  suitable  for  home  use,  as  they  may  be 
detached  from  the  weight  machine  quickly  and  can  then  be  put  away  in  a 

very  small  space  until  the  next  opportunity  for  use  presents  itself. 
Ta  be  used  in  connec- 
tion only  with  chest 
weights  which  have 

center  arm   adjust-      //     -a^a  .^   -~-^_a»^i« 
ment.  or  with  handles  ^ 

arranged  so  that  they 


can  be  pulled  from  a 
bracket  close  to  the 

floor. 

No.  I .    This  attachment  as  will  be  noted,  has 
out-riggers  and  arms  similar  to  the  rowing  ma- 
chine, and  offers  a  great  variety  of  work  when  used  in  connection  with  the 
chest  weight  ...  .      Complete,  S I  O.OO 

No.  a.  Designed  to 
fill  the  demand  for  a 
low  priced  article  of 
this  kind,  built  along 
substantial  lines.  Will  give  entire  satisfaction.  .  Complete.  98.  OO 

NOTE-Theae,  Attachment*  can  bo  used  only  In  connection  with  the)  Ho.  » 
Tjpe  of  Cheat  Weight  Machine. 


New  Tork 
Botton 


Philadelphia 
Pituburg 
Baltimore 


Waihlnjton 

Atlanta 
New  Orleans 


Prices  In  tlfntjuly  S.  1909.   Subffcl  lo  change  without  vottix. 


THE  SPALDINGfciTRADE-MARK  'Sum- 


Sandow's  Patent 

S!*  Dumb  Bells 


DOC 


A.  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 

SOLE  AMERICAN  AND  CANADIAN  LICENSEES 


AN  ENTIRE  SYSTEM  of  Physical  Culture  is  em- 
Q  braced  within  the  exercises  possible  with  these 
'  wonderful  dumb  bells. 

The  bells  are  made  in  two  halves  connected 
by  steel  springs,  the  effort  necessary  in  gripping  com- 
pelling the  pupil  to  continually  devote  his  whole  mind  to 
each  movement.  This  concentration  of  will  power  on  each 
muscle  involved  is  what  is  responsible  for  the  great  results 
obtained  through  properly  exercising  with  them. 


Sandow  s  Patent  Spring  Grip  Dumb  Bells 


No.  6. 

springs. 

No.  4. 

springs. 
No.  2. 
springs. 


MEN'S.     Nickel-plated;  fitted  with  seven  steel 

jr.       .  v     .  .         Per  pair,  $3.0O 

LADIES'.     Nickel-plated ;  fitted  with  five  steel 

Per  pair,  $2.5O 

BOYS'.      Nickel-plated;  fitted   with   four  steel 
Per  pair,  $2.OO 


We  Include  with  each  pair  of  Sandow  Dumb  Bells  a 
Chart  of  exercises  by  Sandow  and  fall  Instructions 
tor  using.  Also  a  piece  of  selvyt  cloth  for  keeping 
in  good  condition. 


No.  2.    BOYS1 


H!^-   Co^nu^on^^    £    Q    SPALDING 

&B.  I?  «"k  C     tnant/  of  the  following         -^Siil 
DKAJD.            cities  will  rtcelix  attention. 

Hew  York 
Boiton 
Syracuse 
BgU* 

Philadelphia 
Plttsburg 
Baltimore 
Montrea 

Washington 
Atlanta 
New  Orleans 
L  Canada 

FOR  STKEET  WJ 

IBESS  SEE  INSIDE  rfOHT  COVE* 

Chicago 
Cincinnati 
Cleveland 
golumbjji 

St.  Louis 
Kansas  City 
Denver 

Detroit 

San  Francisco 
Seattle 
Minneapolis 
St.  Paul 

London, 
|  England 

Edinburgh, 
Scotland 

Sydney, 
Aurtralla 

Y 

THE  SPALDING 

GUARANTEES 
r-*       QUALITY 


TRADE-MARK 

I         ACCEPT  NO 

SUBSTITUTE    g 


Communications  addressed  to 

lei<*i 
EifUid 

A.  G.  8PALDINQ  &  BROS. 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention 

For  street  number*  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  book 

Hliborgh 
Sc«llaM 

Hew  T*rk 
••Hal* 
SyracMC 

•trim 

rillskirf 
ClcvelaW 

Pbilarfrlphla 
H'ashlifloB 
••HlBvrc 

Cklcai* 
Dflroil 
AUaita 

SI.  tools 
Deiver 
S«aHU 

Ciotliiall 
KaBtai  City 

Mtoiripdh 

SIB  friiclsfo 
New  Orlcau 
M«itreal,Cai. 

THE  SPALDING^ 

GUARANTEES        tS 
-^       QUALITY 


TRADE-MARK 

|         ACCEPT  NO 
SUBSTITUTE 


The  Spalding  Ofiicial 
Intercollegiate  Foot  Ball 

No.JS.  This  is  the  oidy  Official 
Rugby  Foot  Ball,  and  is  used  in 
every  important  match  played 
in  America.  Guaranteed  abso- 
lutely if  seal  of  box  is  unbroken. 
We  pack,  with  leather  case  and 
pure  Para  rubber  bladder,  an 
inflater,  lacing  needle  and  raw- 
hide lace.  Complete.  $5  .OO 

Ihe  Spalding  Official 
Basket  Ball 

No.  M  .  Officially  adopted  and 
standard.  The  cover  is  made 
in  four  sections,  with  capleis 
ends  and  of  the  finest  and  most 
carefully  selected  pebble  grain 
English  leather.  We  take  the 
entire  output  of  this  high  grade 
of  leather  from  the  English 
tanners,  and  in  the  Official  Bas- 
ket Ball  use  the  choicest  parts 
of  each  hide.  The  bladder  is 
made  specially  for  this  ball  of 
extra  quality  Para  rubber.  Each 
ball  packed  complete  in  sealed 
box.  Complete.  $6.OO 

The  Spalding  Official 
Association  Foot  Ball 

No.  L  .  The  case  is  construe* 
ted  in  four  sections  with  cap- 
less  ends,  neat  in  appearance 
and  very  serviceable.  Material 
and  workmanship  of  highest 
quality  and  fully  guaranteed. 
Each  ball  is  packed  complete  in 
sealed  box,  with  pure  Pararub- 
ber  guaranteed  bladder,  foot 
ball  inflater,  rawhide  lace  and 
lacing  needle.  Contents  guar- 
anteed if  seal  is  unbroken. 

Complete,  S5.OO 


|  Montreal 
Canada 


Communications  addressed  to 

A.  G.  SPALDING    &    BROS. 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention 
For  street  numbers  see  Inside  front  cover  of  this  book. 


London 
England 


I  New  York 

Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston 
PIttsburg 
Baltimore 


Philadelphia 
Washington 
New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Delroit 


Cincinnati 

Kansas  City 

St.  Louis 


San  Francisco 

Denver  * 

Minneapolis 


ffJMt  fe  efftet  Jvtg  \  19Q9,      Subject  to  chang*  v-it*rmt  nat-ia*. 


THE  SPALDING 

GUARANTEES 
QUALITY 


TRADE-MARK 

ACCEPT  NO 

SUBSTITUTE 


Durand-Steel 
Lockers 


»?*> 


Wooden  lockers  are  objectionable* 

because  they  attract  vermin, -absorb  odors, 
can  be  easily  broken  into,  and  are  dangerous 
on  account  of  fire. 

Lockers  made  from  wire  mesh  or 
expanded  metal  afford  little  secur- 
ity, as  they  can  be  easily  entered  with  wire  cut* 
ters.  Clothes  placed  in  them  become  covered 
with  dust,  and  the  lockers  themselves  present 
a  poor  appearance,  resembling  animal  cages. 
Durand-Steel  Lockers  are  made  of  finest 
grade  furniture  steel  and  are  finished  with 
gloss  black,  furnace-baked  japan  (400°),  comparable 
to  that  used  on  hospital  ware,  which  will  never  flake 
off  nor  require  refinishing,  as  do  paints  and  enamels. 


Some 
Public 


•  U  Loonere  In  Double  Tle»  Three  Lockers  In  Single  Tier 

CATALOGUE!  HAILED  C  K>  *  BB4DBBT 


Of  the  6,000  Durand-Steel  Locker*  Installed  In  th» 
Oymnasluma  of  Chicago,     la'x  io'»  42',  Double  Tier. 

Dnrand-  Steel  Lockers  are  usually  built  with 
doors  perforated  full  length  in  panel  design  with  sides 
and  backs  solid.  This  prevents  clothes  in  one  locker 
from  coming  in  contact  with  wet  garments 
in  adjoining  lockers,  while  plenty  of  venti- 
lation is  secured  by  having  the  door  perfo- 
rated its  entire  length,  but,  if  the  purchaser 
prefers,  we  perforate  the  backs  also. 

The  cost  of  Durand-Steel  Lockers 
Is  no  more  than  that  of  first-class 
wooden  lockers,  and  they  last  as  long 
as  the  building,  are  sanitary,  secure,  and, 
in  addition,  are  fire-proof. 

THE  FOLLOWING  STANDARD  SIZES  AKB 
THOSE  MOST  COMMONLY  USED  : 
DOUBLE  TIER 
tax  12  i  36  Inch 
18  x  IB  i  36  Inch 

12  >  12  142  Inch 
16X16X43  Inch 

SPECIAL  SIZES  MADE  TO  ORDER. 

We  are  handling  lockers  as  a  special  coj- 
tract  business,  and  shipment  will  in  every 
case  be  made  direct  from  the  factory  in 
Chicago.  If  you  will  let  us  know  the  num- 
ber of  lockers,  size  and  arrangement,  we 
Shall  be  glad  to  take  up,  through  corre- 
spondence, the  matter  of  prices. 


SINGLE    TIER 
12  i  12  160  Inch 

ie  i  isneo  inch 
tax  19x73  Inch 
16x16x79  Inch, 


Montreal 
Canada 

Communications  addressed  to 

A.    Q.    SPALDING    &    BROS., 

<••      in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention. 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  book. 

London 
England 

New  York 
Buffalo 

sjssr 

Chicago 
Detroit 
St  Loots 
Denver 

PtttSbBTf 

Baltimore 

Philadelphia  1  New  Orleans 
Washlnflton  1  Kansas  City 

Cleveland  1  San  Francisco 
Cincinnati  1   Mtnneapolli 

frieM  in  tfftct  July  8.  l»Q8.    £uij«:i  to  changt  without  notice 


rE  following  index  from  Spalding's  latest  Catalogues      |j 
will  give  an  idea  of   the  great  variety  of  Athletic 
Goods  manufactured  by  A.  G.  Spalding  &   Bros. 

Ankle  Brace.  Skate 

Gloves,  Base  Ball 

Pad,  Chamois,  Fencing 

Shoes,  Skating 

Archery 

Gloves,  Cricket 

Pads,  Foot  Ball 

Shoes,  Squash 

Ash  Bars 

Gloves,  Fencing 

Paint,  Golf 

Shoes,  Tennis 

Athletic  Library 

Gloves,  Golf 

Pants,  Base  Ball 

Shot,  Indoor 

Attachments.  Chest  Weight 

Gloves,  Handball 

Pants,  Basket  Ball 

Shot,  Massage 

bags.  Bathing  Suit 

Gloves:  Hockey 
Glove  Softener 

Pants,  Boys'  Knee 
Pants,  Foot  Ball 

Skate  Bags 
Skates.  Hotkey 

Bags,  Caddy 

Goals,  Basket  Ball 

Pants.  Hockey 

Skate  Holders 

Bags.  Cricket 

Goal  Cage,  Polo 

Pants,  Roller  Polo 

Skates,  Ice 

Bags,  Uniform 

Goals,  Foot  Ball 

Pants,  Running 

Skates,  Racing 

Balls,  Base 

Goals,  Hockey 

Pistol,  Starter's 

Skates.  Rink,  Ice 

Balls,  Basket 
Ball  Cleaner.  Golf 

Golf  Clubs 
Golf  Counters 

Plastrons,  Fencing 
Plates,  Base  Ball  Shoe 

Skate  Rollers 
Skates,  Roller 

Balls,  Cricket 
Balls,  Golf 
Balls,  Playground 

GoUette 
Grips,  Athletic 
Grips,  Golf 

Plates,  Home 
Plates,  Marking 
Plates,  Pitchers'  Box 

Skates,  Tubular 
Skate  Strap* 
Skis 

Balls,  Squash 
Balls,  Tennis 
Bandages,  Elastic 

Guy  Ropes  and  Peg* 
Gymnasium,  Home 
Gymnasium  Board,  Home 

Plates,  Teeing 
Platforms,  Striking  Bag 
Poles,  Ski 

Sleeve  Bands.  College 
Slippers,  Bathing 
Snow  Shoes 

Bar  Bells 
Bar  Stalls 
Bars,  Parallel 
Bases,  Base  Ball 
Bases,  Indoor 
Basket  Ball  Wear 
Bathing  Suits 
Bat's,  Base  Ball 
Bats,  Cricket 
Bats,  Indoor 
Ratting  Cage,  Base  Ball 
Belts 
Bladders.  Basket  Ball 
Bladders,  Foot  Ball 
Bladders.  Striking  Bag* 
Blades,  Fencing 
Blouses,  Umpire 

Hammers,  Athletic 
Handballs 
Handle  Cover.  Rubber 
Hangers  for  Indian  Club* 
Hats,  University 
Head  Harness 
Health  Pull 
Hob  Nails 
Hockey  Stick* 
Hole  Cutter.  JoU 
Hole  Rim,  G<-'' 
Horizontal  bar* 
Hurdles,  Safety 

Indoor  Base  Ball 
Indian  Clubs 
Infiaters,  Foot  Ball 

Poles,  Vaulting 
Polo,  Roller,  Goods 
Protector,  Abdomen 
Protector,  Elbow 
Protector,  .Polo 
Protection  for  Running  Shoes 
Pucks,  Hockey 
Push  Ball 
Pushers,  Chamois 
Puttees,  Golf 

Suantity  Price* 
uoits 

Racket  Cover* 
Rackets,  Lawn  Tennis 
Racket  Presses 

Squash  Goods 
Standards,  Vaulting 
Standards,  Volley  Ball 
Starters'  Pistol 
Steel  Cable 
Sticks,  Polo 
Stockings 
Stop  Boards 
Striking  Bags 
Studs,  Golf 
Stumps  and  Bails 
Suits,  Union,  Foot  Ball 
Supporters 
Supporters.  Ankle 
Supporters.  Wrist 

Sweaters 

Boxing  Gloves 

Inflaters,  Striking  Bag 

Rackets  Restrung 
Rapiers 

Swimming  Suits 

Caddy  Badges 
Caps,  Base  Ball 

Jackets,  Fencing 
Jackets,  Foot  Ball 

Reels  for  Tennis  P6*tt 
Referees'  Horns 

Swivel  Striking  Bag* 
Swords.  Fencing 

Caps,  University 

Jackets,  Swimming 

Referees'  Whistle 

Swords.  Duelling 

Caps,  Skull 
Center  Forks,  Iron 
Center  Straps,  Canvas 
Chest  Weights 

Jersey* 
Knee  Protectors 
Knickerbockers.  Foot  Ball 

Rings,  Exercising 
Rings,  Swinging 
Rowing  Machines 
Roque 

Tackling  Machine 
Take  off  Board 
Tapes.  Adhesive 
Tapes,  Marking 

Coats,  Base  Ball 

Lace,  Foot  BUI 

Tapes,  Measuring 

Collars,  Swimming 

Lanes  for  Sprints 

Scabbards  for  Skate* 

Tees,  Golf 

Lawn  Bowls 

Score  Board,  Golf 

Tennis  Posts 

Corks,  Running 

Leg  Guards,  Cricket 

Score  Books.  Base  Ball 

Tether  Tenni* 

Cricket  Goods 
Croquet  Goods 
Cross  Bars 

Discus,  Olympic 

Leg  Gauds,  Foot  Ball 
Leg  Guards,  Hockey 
Leg  Guards,  Polo 
Letters,  Embroidered 
Letters,  Woven 

Score  Books,  Basket  Ball 
Score  Books,  Cricket 
Score  Books,  GoU. 
Score  Books,  Tennis 
Scoring  Tablets,  Base  Ball 

Tights 
Toboggans 
Toboggan  Cushions 
Toboggan  Toe  Cap* 
Toe  Boards 

Discs,  Marking 
Discs,  Rubber  Golf 
Disks,  Striking  Bag 
Dumb  Bells 

Emblems 
Equestrian  Fold 
Exerciser,  Home 
Exhibition  Clubs 

Lockers,  Durand-Stee! 
Mallet,  Cricket 
Markers.  Tennis 
Masks,  Base  Ball 
Masks,  Fencing 
Masks.  Nose 
Masseur,  Abdominal 
Mattresses 

Seven-Foot  Circle 
Shin  Guards,  Association 
Shin  Guards,  Rugby 
SninGuards,  Hockey 
Shin  Guards,  Polo 
Shirts,  Base  Ball 
Shirts,  Basket  Ball 
Shirt  ,  Sleeveless 
Shoe     Base  Ball 

Toques 
Trapeze.  Adjustable 
Trapeze,  Single 
Trousers,  Y.  M.  C.  A. 
Trunks,  Bathing 
Trunks,  Velvet 
Trunks,  Worsted 
Umpire  Indicator 

Fencing  Sticks 

Medicine  Balls 

Shoe  ,  Basket  Ball 

Uniforms,  Base  Ball 

Fie  d  Hockey 
Finger  Protection 

Megaphones 
Mitts,  Base  Ball 

Shoe  ,  Bowling 
Shoe  ,  Cross  Country 

Varnish  for  Got 
Volley  Balls 

Flags,  College 

Mitts,  Handball 

Shoe  .  Cricket 

Water  Polo  Ball 

Flags,  Marking 

Mitts,  Striking  Bag 

Shoe  ,  Fencing 

Wands.  Calisthenic 

Foils/Fencing 

Mocassins 

Shoes,  Foot  Ball,  Association 

Watches,  Stop 

Foot  Balls.  Association 

Mouthpiece.  Foot  Ball 

Shoes,  Foot  Ball,  Rugby 

Water  Wings 

Foot  Balls,  Rugby 

Needle,  Lacing 

Shoes,  Golf 

Weights,  s£lb. 

Foot  Ball  Goal  Net* 

Nets,  Tennis 

Shoes,  Gymnasium 

Whistles.  Referees' 

Foot  Ball  Timer 

Net,  Volley  Ball 

Shoes,  Jumping 

Whitely  Exerciser 

Fed  Flag* 

Numbers,  Competitors 

Shoes,  Running 

Wrist  Machine 

Standard  Policy 

A  Standard  Quality  must  be  inseparably  linked  to  a  Standard  Policy. 

Without  a  definite  and  Standard  Mercantile  Policy,  it  is  impossible  for  a  manufacturer  to  long 
maintain  a  Standard  Quality. 

To  market  his  goods  through  the  jobber,  a  manufacturer  must  provide  a  profit  for  the  jobber  as 
well  as  the  retail  dealer.  To  meet  these  conditions  of  Dual  Profits,  the  manufacturer  is  obliged  to 
set  a  proportionately  high  list  price  on  his  goods  to  the  consumer. 

To  enable  the  glib  salesman,  when  booking  his  orders,  to  figure  out  attractive  profits  to  both  the 
jobber  and  retailer,  these  high  list  prices  are  absolutely  essential ;  but  their  real  purpose  will  have  been 
served  when  the  manufacturer  has  secured  his  order  from  the  jobber,  and  the  jobber  has  secured  his 
order  from  the  retailer. 

However,  these  deceptive  high  list  prices  are  not  fair  to  the  consumer,  who  does  not,  and,  in 
reality,  is  not  ever  expected  to  pay  these  fancy  list  prices. 

When  the  season  opens  for  the  sale  of  such  goods,  with  their  misleading  but  alluring  high  list 
prices,  the  retailer  begins  to  realize  his  responsibilities,  and  grapples  with  the  situation  as  best  he 
can,  by  offering  "special  discounts,"  which  vary  with  local  trade  conditions. 

Under  this  system  of  merchandising,  the  profits  to  both  the  manufacturer  and  the  jobber  are 
assured:  but  as  there  is  no  stability  maintained  in  the  prices  to  the  consumer,  the  keen  competition 
amongtt  the  local  dealers  invariably  leads  to  a  demoralized  cutting  of  prices  by  which  the  profits  of 
the  retailer  are  practically  eliminated. 

This  demoralization  always  reacts  on  the  manufacturer.  >The  jobber  insists  on  lower,  and  still 
lower,  prices.  The  manufacturer  in  his  turn,  meets  this  demand  for  the  lowering  of  prices  by  the 
only  way  open  to  him,  viz. :  the  cheapening  and  degrading  of  the  quality  of  his  product 

The  foregoing  conditions  became  so  intolerable  that,  ten  years  ago,  in  1899,  A.  G.  Spalding 
"%  Bros,  determined  to  rectify  this  demoralization  in  the  Athletic  Goods  Trade,  and  inaugurated  what 
has  since  become  known  as  "The  Spalding  Policy." 

The  "Spalding  Policy"  eliminates  the  jobber  entirely,  so  far  as  Spalding  Goods  are  concerned,^ 
and  the  retail  dealer  secures  his  supply  of  Spalding  Athletic  Goods  direct  from  the  manufacturer 
under  a  restricted  retail  price  arrangement  by  which  the  retail  dealer  is  assured  a  fair,  legitimate  and 
certain  profit  on  all  Spalding  Athletic  Goods,  and  the  consumer  is  assured  a  Standard  Quality  and  is 
protected  from  imposition. 

The  "Spalding  Policy"  is  decidedly  for  the  interest  and  protection  of  the  users  of  Athletic  Goods, 
and  acts  in  two  ways: 

FIRST— The  user  is  assured  of  genuine  Official  Standard  Athletic  Goods,  and 

the  same  fixed  prices  to  everybody 

SECOND— As  manufacturers,  we  can  proceed  with  confidence  in  purchasing  at 
the  proper  time,  the  very  best  raw  materials  required  in  the  manufacture 
of  our  various  goods,  well  ahead  of  their  respective  seasons,  and  this  enables 
us  to  provide  the  necessary  quantity  and  absolutely  maintain  the  Spalding 
Standard  of  Quality. 

All  retail  dealers  handling  Spalding  Athletic 'Goods  are  required  to  supply  consumers  at  our 
regular  printed  catalogue  prices — neither  more  nor  less— the  same  prices  that  similar  goods  are  sold 
for  in  our  New  York,  Chicago  and  other  stores. 

All  Spalding  dealers,  as  well  as  users  of  Spalding  Athletic  Goods,  are  treated  exactly  alike,  and  no 
special  rebates  or  discriminations  are  allowed  to  anyone. 

Positively,  nobody;  not  even  officers,  managers,  salesmen  or  other  employes  of  A.  G.  Spalding 
&  Bros.,  or  any  of  their  relatives  or  personal  friends,  can  buy  Spalding  Athletic  Goods  at  a  discount 
from  the  regular  catalogue  prices. 

This,  briefly,  is  the  "Spalding  Policy,"  which  has  already  been  in  successful  operation  for  the 
past  ten  years,  and  will  be  indefinitely  continued. 

In  other  words,  "  The  Spalding  Policy  "  is  a  "  square  deal "  for  everybody. 

A,  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 
By 


ruiiDurr.  t-' 


o  f- 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


MAY  3     195Q 
REC'D  MLO 


Form  L9-25m-9,'47(A5618)444 


' 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A    001  341  296    o 


